GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ Fast Discrete Cosine Transform
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform?
Algolib is a C++ library for algorithmic trading that provides various algorithms for processing and analyzing financial data. The library includes a Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) implementation, which is a fast version of the Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT) algorithm used for signal processing and data compression.
The FDCT implementation in Algolib is based on the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) algorithm, which is a widely used method for computing the DCT. The implementation is optimized for performance and can handle large datasets efficiently. It uses the standard divide-and-conquer approach to compute the DCT recursively and combines the resulting coefficients to obtain the final DCT of the input signal.
The input to the FDCT algorithm in Algolib is a one-dimensional array of real numbers, which represents a time series or a financial signal. The algorithm then computes the DCT of the input sequence and returns a one-dimensional array of DCT coefficients, which represent the frequency components of the signal.
The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses C++ templates to provide a generic implementation that can work with different data types. It also includes various optimizations, such as loop unrolling, to improve the performance of the algorithm.
The steps involved in the FDCT algorithm in Algolib are:
-Divide the input sequence into even and odd parts.
-Compute the DCT of the even and odd parts recursively.
-Combine the DCT coefficients of the even and odd parts to obtain the final DCT coefficients.
-The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses the FFTW (Fastest Fourier Transform in the West) library to perform the FFT computations, which is a highly optimized library for computing Fourier transforms.
In summary, the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform implementation in Algolib is a fast and efficient implementation of the DCT algorithm, which is used for processing financial signals and time series data. The implementation is optimized for performance and uses the FFT algorithm for fast computation. The implementation is generic and can work with different data types, and includes optimizations such as loop unrolling to improve the performance of the algorithm.
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is an algorithm used for signal processing and data compression that can also be applied in trading forex. The FDCT is used to transform financial data into a set of coefficients that represent the data in terms of cosine functions of different frequencies. These coefficients can be used to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and to develop trading strategies based on these components.
In trading forex, the FDCT can be applied to various financial signals, such as price data, volume data, and technical indicators. By applying the FDCT to these signals, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the signals and use this information to develop trading strategies.
For example, traders can use the FDCT to identify cycles in the market and use this information to develop trend-following strategies. The FDCT can also be used to identify short-term fluctuations in the market and develop mean-reversion strategies based on these fluctuations.
The FDCT can also be used in combination with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to improve the accuracy of trading signals. For example, traders can apply the FDCT to the moving average of a financial signal to identify the dominant frequency components of the moving average and use this information to develop trading signals.
The FDCT can also be used in conjunction with machine learning algorithms to develop predictive models for financial markets. By applying the FDCT to financial data and using the resulting coefficients as inputs to a machine learning algorithm, traders can develop models that predict future price movements and identify profitable trading opportunities.
In summary, the FDCT can be applied in trading forex to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and develop trading strategies based on these components. The FDCT can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and machine learning algorithms to improve the accuracy of trading signals and develop predictive models for financial markets.
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is an algorithm used for signal processing and data compression that can also be applied in trading forex. The FDCT is used to transform financial data into a set of coefficients that represent the data in terms of cosine functions of different frequencies. These coefficients can be used to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and to develop trading strategies based on these components.
In trading forex, the FDCT can be applied to various financial signals, such as price data, volume data, and technical indicators. By applying the FDCT to these signals, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the signals and use this information to develop trading strategies.
For example, traders can use the FDCT to identify cycles in the market and use this information to develop trend-following strategies. The FDCT can also be used to identify short-term fluctuations in the market and develop mean-reversion strategies based on these fluctuations.
The FDCT can also be used in combination with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to improve the accuracy of trading signals. For example, traders can apply the FDCT to the moving average of a financial signal to identify the dominant frequency components of the moving average and use this information to develop trading signals.
The FDCT can also be used in conjunction with machine learning algorithms to develop predictive models for financial markets. By applying the FDCT to financial data and using the resulting coefficients as inputs to a machine learning algorithm, traders can develop models that predict future price movements and identify profitable trading opportunities.
In summary, the FDCT can be applied in trading forex to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and develop trading strategies based on these components. The FDCT can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and machine learning algorithms to improve the accuracy of trading signals and develop predictive models for financial markets.
█ Relative Strength Index (RSI)
This indicator contains 7 different types of RSI .
RSX
Regular
Slow
Rapid
Harris
Cuttler
Ehlers Smoothed
What is RSI?
RSI stands for Relative Strength Index . It is a technical indicator used to measure the strength or weakness of a financial instrument's price action.
The RSI is calculated based on the price movement of an asset over a specified period of time, typically 14 days, and is expressed on a scale of 0 to 100. The RSI is considered overbought when it is above 70 and oversold when it is below 30.
Traders and investors use the RSI to identify potential buy and sell signals. When the RSI indicates that an asset is oversold, it may be considered a buying opportunity, while an overbought RSI may signal that it is time to sell or take profits.
It's important to note that the RSI should not be used in isolation and should be used in conjunction with other technical and fundamental analysis tools to make informed trading decisions.
What is RSX?
Jurik RSX is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index Smoothed ( RSX ) indicator. It was developed by Mark Jurik and is designed to help traders identify trends and momentum in the market.
The Jurik RSX uses a combination of the RSX indicator and an adaptive moving average (AMA) to smooth out the price data and reduce the number of false signals. The adaptive moving average is designed to adjust the smoothing period based on the current market conditions, which makes the indicator more responsive to changes in price.
The Jurik RSX can be used to identify potential trend reversals and momentum shifts in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend . Traders can use these levels to make trading decisions, such as buying when the indicator crosses above 50 and selling when it crosses below 50.
The Jurik RSX is a more advanced version of the RSX indicator, and while it can be useful in identifying potential trade opportunities, it should not be used in isolation. It is best used in conjunction with other technical and fundamental analysis tools to make informed trading decisions.
What is Slow RSI?
Slow RSI is a variation of the traditional Relative Strength Index ( RSI ) indicator. It is a more smoothed version of the RSI and is designed to filter out some of the noise and short-term price fluctuations that can occur with the standard RSI .
The Slow RSI uses a longer period of time than the traditional RSI , typically 21 periods instead of 14. This longer period helps to smooth out the price data and makes the indicator less reactive to short-term price fluctuations.
Like the traditional RSI , the Slow RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Slow RSI is a more conservative version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also be slower to respond to changes in price, which may result in missed trading opportunities. Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Slow RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Rapid RSI?
Same as regular RSI but with a faster calculation method
What is Harris RSI?
Harris RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by Larry Harris and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Harris RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It takes into account both the opening and closing prices of a financial instrument, as well as the high and low prices. The Harris RSI is also normalized to a range of 0 to 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend .
Like the traditional RSI , the Harris RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Harris RSI is a more advanced version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Harris RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Cuttler RSI?
Cuttler RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by Curt Cuttler and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Cuttler RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It takes into account the difference between the closing price of a financial instrument and the average of the high and low prices over a specified period of time. This difference is then normalized to a range of 0 to 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend .
Like the traditional RSI , the Cuttler RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Cuttler RSI is a more advanced version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Cuttler RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Ehlers Smoothed RSI?
Ehlers smoothed RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by John Ehlers and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Ehlers smoothed RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It uses a smoothing algorithm that is designed to reduce the noise and random fluctuations that can occur with the standard RSI . The smoothing algorithm is based on a concept called "digital signal processing" and is intended to improve the accuracy of the indicator.
Like the traditional RSI , the Ehlers smoothed RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Ehlers smoothed RSI can be useful in identifying longer-term trends and momentum shifts in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Ehlers smoothed RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
█ GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform
What is the RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a popular technical indicator used in trading forex to measure the strength of a trend and identify potential trend reversals. While the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is not directly related to the RSI, it can be used to analyze the frequency components of the price data used to calculate the RSI and improve its accuracy.
The RSI is calculated by comparing the average gains and losses of a financial instrument over a given period of time. The RSI value ranges from 0 to 100, with values above 70 indicating an overbought market and values below 30 indicating an oversold market.
One limitation of the RSI is that it only considers the average gains and losses over a fixed period of time, which may not capture the complex patterns and dynamics of financial markets. This is where the FDCT can be useful.
By applying the FDCT to the price data used to calculate the RSI, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the price data and use this information to adjust the RSI calculation. For example, traders can weight the gains and losses based on the frequency components identified by the FDCT, giving more weight to the dominant frequencies and less weight to the lower frequencies.
This approach can improve the accuracy of the RSI calculation and provide traders with more reliable signals for identifying trends and potential trend reversals. Traders can also use the frequency components identified by the FDCT to develop more advanced trading strategies, such as identifying cycles in the market and using this information to develop trend-following strategies.
In summary, while the FDCT is not directly related to the RSI, it can be used to analyze the frequency components of the price data used to calculate the RSI and improve its accuracy. Traders can use the FDCT to identify dominant frequency components and adjust the RSI calculation accordingly, providing more reliable signals for identifying trends and potential trend reversals.
This indicator has period lengths that are powers of powers of 2. There is also a features to increase the resolution of the FDCT.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
Recherche dans les scripts pour "entry"
GKD-V Hurst Exponent [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Hurst Exponent is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Vortex
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Hurst Exponent
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The goal of the fractal dimension index is to determine whether the market is trending or in a trading range. It does not measure the direction of the trend. A value less than 1.5 indicates that the price series is persistent or that the market is trending. Lower values of the FDI indicate a stronger trend. A value greater than 1.5 indicates that the market is in a trading range and is acting in a more random fashion.
What is the Hurst Exponent?
The Hurst exponent is a statistical measure that describes the degree of long-term memory in a time series data, including forex trading data. It is used to identify the persistence or anti-persistence of the data over different time horizons.
In forex trading, the Hurst exponent can be used to identify the degree of trendiness in price movements. When the Hurst exponent is above 0.5, it indicates that the price movements have a persistent or trending behavior, while a Hurst exponent below 0.5 suggests that the price movements are anti-persistent or mean-reverting in nature.
The Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is another technical indicator used in forex trading that is related to the Hurst exponent. The FDI measures the degree of self-similarity or fractal dimension of the price movements over different time horizons. A high FDI indicates that the price movements are more self-similar and fractal-like, while a low FDI suggests that the price movements are less self-similar and more random in nature.
The Hurst exponent and the FDI are related because they both measure the degree of persistence or anti-persistence in price movements. In fact, the Hurst exponent can be calculated from the FDI using a simple formula. The formula relates the Hurst exponent to the FDI through the expression H = 2 - FDI.
Traders can use the Hurst exponent and the FDI in conjunction with other technical indicators to identify trading opportunities in the forex market. For example, a trader may use a high Hurst exponent or a high FDI to identify a strong trend and use a trend-following strategy. Conversely, a low Hurst exponent or a low FDI may suggest a potential trend reversal, prompting the trader to use a mean-reversion strategy.
In summary, the Hurst exponent and the FDI are two technical indicators that measure the degree of persistence or anti-persistence in price movements in the forex market. They are related because they both measure the fractal-like behavior of the price movements over different time horizons. Traders can use these indicators in combination with other technical analysis techniques to identify trading opportunities and manage risk.
Requirements
Inputs
Chained: GKD-B Baseline
Solo: NA, no inputs
Outputs
Chained: GKD-C indicators Confirmation 1 or Solo Confirmation Complex
Solo: GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau Ergodic MACD as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD
The Blau Ergodic MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by William Blau. It is a modification of the traditional MACD indicator, designed to provide a smoother and more responsive moving average calculation. The Blau Ergodic MACD incorporates the concept of Ergodicity, which is a mathematical concept that describes the long-term behavior of a system. The Ergodicity principle is used to filter out market noise and provide a clearer representation of the underlying trend.
The Blau Ergodic MACD consists of two lines, the Blau line and the signal line. The Blau line is calculated as the difference between two exponential moving averages (EMAs) that are smoothed using the Ergodicity principle. The signal line is a moving average of the Blau line. When the Blau line crosses above the signal line, it is considered a bullish signal, while a bearish signal is generated when the Blau line crosses below the signal line.
The Blau Ergodic MACD is a useful tool for traders and investors to identify potential trend reversals and to make informed trading decisions. It is particularly useful in volatile markets, where traditional technical indicators may be less effective.
This indicator includes both the Blau Ergodic MACD and the Blau MACD. The regular MACD is a zero-line cross, the Ergodic version is described above.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator
What is OMA?
Adaptive, One More Moving Average (OMA) is an adaptive moving average created by Mladen Rakic that changes shape with volatility and momentum
The usual story goes something like this : which is the best moving average? Everyone that ever started to do any kind of technical analysis was pulled into this "game". Comparing, testing, looking for new ones, testing ...
The idea of this one is simple: it should not be itself, but it should be a kind of a chameleon - it should "imitate" as much other moving averages as it can. So the need for zillion different moving averages would diminish. And it should have some extra, of course:
The extras:
it has to be smooth
it has to be able to "change speed" without length change
it has to be able to adapt or not (since it has to "imitate" the non-adaptive as well as the adaptive ones)
The steps:
Smoothing - compared are the simple moving average (that is the basis and the first step of this indicator - a smoothed simple moving average with as little lag added as it is possible and as close to the original as it is possible) Speed 1 and non-adaptive are the reference for this basic setup.
Speed changing - same chart only added one more average with "speeds" 2 and 3 (for comparison purposes only here)
Finally - adapting : same chart with SMA compared to one more average with speed 1 but adaptive (so this parameters would make it a "smoothed adaptive simple average") Adapting part is a modified Kaufman adapting way and this part (the adapting part) may be a subject for changes in the future (it is giving satisfactory results, but if or when I find a better way, it will be implemented here)
Some comparisons for different speed settings (all the comparisons are without adaptive turned on, and are approximate. Approximation comes from a fact that it is impossible to get exactly the same values from only one way of calculation, and frankly, I even did not try to get those same values).
speed 0.5 - T3 (0.618 Tilson)
speed 2.5 - T3 (0.618 Fulks/Matulich)
speed 1 - SMA , harmonic mean
speed 2 - LWMA
speed 7 - very similar to Hull and TEMA
speed 8 - very similar to LSMA and Linear regression value
Parameters:
Length - length (period) for averaging
Source - price to use for averaging
Speed - desired speed (i limited to -1.5 on the lower side but it even does not need that limit - some interesting results with speeds that are less than 0 can be achieved)
Adaptive - does it adapt or not
What is OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator?
We refer to the Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator (ECO) as a momentum indicator, which considers the candlestick body's size and direction. It is a reliable and smooth momentum indicator because it is not affected by price gaps, unlike other momentum indicators. It can be used to confirm or define trends, and we use it as an alternative to weekly indicators. To determine the trend, you can look at the indicator's location relative to the "0" line, where above "0" indicates an uptrend and below "0" indicates a downtrend. Additionally, the slope and crossing points of the slow and fast lines can be used as an additional qualifier. When the ECO is below "0," only short signals from the Hi-Lo Activator should be taken, and when it is above "0," only long signals should be taken.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator
What is T3?
The T3 Moving Average (T3MA) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by Tim Tillson. It is a trend-following indicator that aims to provide a smoother and more accurate representation of price trends than other moving average indicators.
The T3MA is a type of exponential moving average ( EMA ) that is calculated using a series of complex formulas. Unlike a simple or exponential moving average , which use fixed smoothing factors, the T3MA uses a variable smoothing factor that is based on the volatility of the underlying asset. This means that the T3MA is able to adapt to changing market conditions and provide more accurate signals.
The formula for calculating the T3MA is as follows:
T3 = a * EMA1 + (1 - a) * T3
Where:
-T3 is the current value of the T3MA
-EMA1 is the current value of the first EMA
-T3 is the previous value of the T3MA
-a is the smoothing factor, which is based on the volatility of the underlying asset and is calculated using the following formulas:
-c1 = -1 + exp (-sqrt(2) * pi / period)
-c2 = 2 * c1 * c1 + 2 * c1
-c3 = 1 - c1 - c2
-a = c1 * sqrt(period) * (close - T3) + c2 * T3 + c3 * EMA1
In simple terms, the T3MA is calculated by taking a weighted average of two different EMAs, with the weight given to each EMA depending on the volatility of the asset being analyzed. The T3MA is then smoothed using a second smoothing factor, which further reduces noise and improves the accuracy of the indicator.
The T3MA can be used in a variety of ways by traders and analysts. Some common applications include using the T3MA as a trend-following indicator, with buy signals generated when the price of an asset crosses above the T3MA and sell signals generated when the price crosses below. The T3MA can also be used in combination with other indicators and analytical techniques to confirm trading decisions and identify potential trend reversals.
Overall, the T3 Moving Average is a highly sophisticated and complex technical indicator that is designed to provide a more accurate and reliable representation of price trends. While it may be difficult for novice traders to understand and use effectively, experienced traders and analysts may find the T3MA to be a valuable tool in their trading toolbox.
What is T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator?
We refer to the Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator (ECO) as a momentum indicator, which considers the candlestick body's size and direction. It is a reliable and smooth momentum indicator because it is not affected by price gaps, unlike other momentum indicators. It can be used to confirm or define trends, and we use it as an alternative to weekly indicators. To determine the trend, you can look at the indicator's location relative to the "0" line, where above "0" indicates an uptrend and below "0" indicates a downtrend. Additionally, the slope and crossing points of the slow and fast lines can be used as an additional qualifier. When the ECO is below "0," only short signals from the Hi-Lo Activator should be taken, and when it is above "0," only long signals should be taken.
The difference here is that instead of using a regular old SMA or EMA, we use T3 for the double smoothing and signal.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Grucha Percentage Index as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index
The Grucha Percentage Index finds the difference between open and close prices and then runs a comparison based on whether the difference is positive or negative. This indicator has three types of signals:
1. Trigger line cross over 50 line
2. Signal line cross over 50 line
3. Trigger over/under signal line crosses
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: FDI-Adaptive Supertrend as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is a measure of the complexity or irregularity of a geometric shape or pattern. It is a mathematical concept that quantifies the degree of self-similarity or self-affinity of an object at different scales. The FDI is a real number that represents the scaling behavior of an object in a particular space, and it can be used to characterize a wide range of natural and synthetic phenomena, from coastlines to fractal art.
The FDI is based on the concept of fractals, which are objects that exhibit self-similar or self-affine patterns at different scales. Fractals are characterized by their fractional dimensionality, which is a non-integer number that describes their complexity. The FDI is a measure of this fractional dimensionality, and it can be calculated using a variety of mathematical techniques, including box counting, wavelet analysis, and Fourier analysis.
In practical terms, the FDI can be used to quantify the complexity or roughness of natural surfaces, such as soil or rock, as well as the irregularity of synthetic materials, such as concrete or ceramics. It is also used in image analysis and pattern recognition to characterize the complexity of digital images and to detect patterns that are difficult to discern with traditional methods.
In forex trading, the Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is a technical indicator used to analyze market trends and price movements. The FDI is calculated based on the fractal geometry of price charts and is used to identify support and resistance levels, as well as potential changes in trend direction.
The FDI indicator works by measuring the fractal dimensionality of price movements. Fractals are self-similar or self-affine patterns that repeat at different scales, and they can be used to identify key levels of support and resistance in the market. The FDI indicator calculates the fractal dimension of price movements over a specified time period, and it plots the result as a line on the price chart.
Traders use the FDI indicator to identify potential trend changes and to confirm trend direction. When the FDI line crosses above or below a key level, such as 1.5, it may indicate a potential trend reversal. Additionally, when the FDI line is trending in the same direction as the price, it can confirm the current trend and provide additional confidence for traders.
Overall, the Fractal Dimension Index is a technical indicator that can be used to analyze market trends and price movements in forex trading. By measuring the fractal dimensionality of price movements, traders can identify potential support and resistance levels and confirm trend direction.
What is Supertrend?
Supertrend is a popular technical indicator used in trading to identify trends in the market. It is a trend-following indicator that helps traders to identify the direction of the market trend and to enter or exit trades accordingly.
The Supertrend indicator is based on the Average True Range (ATR) and the price action of an asset. It plots a line on the price chart that follows the trend of the asset and indicates potential support and resistance levels. The Supertrend line changes its color when the trend changes, which can be used as a signal to enter or exit trades.
The Supertrend indicator is used to identify both long-term and short-term trends in the market. When the Supertrend line is above the price, it indicates a downtrend, and when it is below the price, it indicates an uptrend. Traders can use the Supertrend indicator to identify potential entry and exit points for their trades, as well as to set stop-loss orders and take-profit levels.
Supertrend is a popular indicator among traders because it is easy to use and can be applied to a variety of markets and timeframes. However, like any technical indicator, it is not perfect and can produce false signals in certain market conditions. Therefore, it is important to use the Supertrend indicator in combination with other indicators and to have a solid trading strategy in place.
What is FDI-Adaptive Supertrend?
FDI-Adaptive Supertrend uses FDI to adapt the period inputs into Supertrend to make Supertrend FDI-adaptive.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Fisher Transform
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter
Damiani Volatmeter is a volatility measurement indicator to determine whether volatility is high enough to trade.
Anything red means that volatility is low. Remember volatility doesn't have a direction. Anything green means volatility high despite the direction of price. The core signal line here is the green and red line that dips below two while threshold lines to "recharge". Maximum recharge happen when the core signal line shows a yellow ping. Soon after one or many yellow pings you should expect a massive upthrust of volatility . The idea here is you don't trade unless volatility is rising or green. This means that the Volatmeter has to dip into the recharge zone, recharge and then spike upward. You can also attempt to buy or sell reversals with confluence indicators when volatility is in the recharge zone, but I wouldn't recommend this. However, if you so choose to do this, then use the following indicator for confluence.
And last reminder, volatility doesn't have a direction! Red doesn't mean short, and green doesn't mean long, Red means don't trade period regardless of direction long/short, and green means trade no matter the direction long/short. This means you'll have to add an indicator that does show direction such as a mean reversion indicator like Fisher Transform or a Gaussian Filter. You can search my public scripts for various Fisher Transform and Gaussian Filter indicators.
Requirements
Inputs
Chained: GKD-B Baseline
Solo: NA, no inputs
Outputs
Chained: GKD-C indicators Confirmation 1 or Solo Confirmation Complex
Solo: GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Adaptive Parabolic SAR [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Adaptive Parabolic SAR is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Adaptive Parabolic SAR as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Adaptive Parabolic SAR
The Parabolic SAR indicator typically uses a fixed acceleration factor and step to calculate its values, which can result in false signals or inefficient performance in certain market conditions. The Adaptive Parabolic SAR attempts to address this issue by dynamically adjusting its acceleration factor and step based on the current market volatility and price movement.
The Adaptive Parabolic SAR uses an algorithm that is designed to adjust the acceleration factor and step in real-time based on the recent price action. This allows the indicator to be more responsive to changes in the market, while still maintaining its ability to provide reliable signals.
The indicator works by plotting a series of dots above or below the price bars, depending on the direction of the trend. When the dots are below the price bars, it indicates a bullish trend, and when the dots are above the price bars, it indicates a bearish trend. The dots also move closer to the price bars as the trend becomes stronger, and further away as the trend weakens.
Traders can use the Adaptive Parabolic SAR as a tool to identify potential trend reversals or to confirm the current trend. It is often used in conjunction with other technical indicators and price action analysis to develop trading strategies.
The Kaufman adaptivity uses efficiency ratio to adapt PSAR while the Ehlers adaptivity uses raw Momentum.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
? Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
? GKD-V EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother
The EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother is a type of filter that is designed to remove noise and provide a smoother representation of data. It is based on the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and uses a deviation correction technique to improve its accuracy. The result is a more precise and reliable signal that can be used for a variety of applications, such as technical analysis in trading or data smoothing in scientific research.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL
Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA (FDASMA) w/ DSL is a fractal-dimension-index-adaptive SMA . The SMA is accelerated during a trend and slowed down during a sideways market, so as to avoid false signals. This indicator uses the fractal dimension to compute an ingest period length into the SMA to output the FDASMA.
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The goal of the fractal dimension index is to determine whether the market is trending or in a trading range. It does not measure the direction of the trend. A value less than 1.5 indicates that the price series is persistent or that the market is trending. Lower values of the FDI indicate a stronger trend. A value greater than 1.5 indicates that the market is in a trading range and is acting in a more random fashion.
What are DSL Discontinued Signal Line?
A lot of indicators are using signal lines in order to determine the trend (or some desired state of the indicator) easier. The idea of the signal line is easy : comparing the value to it's smoothed (slightly lagging) state, the idea of current momentum/state is made.
Discontinued signal line is inheriting that simple signal line idea and it is extending it : instead of having one signal line, more lines depending on the current value of the indicator.
"Signal" line is calculated the following way :
When a certain level is crossed into the desired direction, the EMA of that value is calculated for the desired signal line
When that level is crossed into the opposite direction, the previous "signal" line value is simply "inherited" and it becomes a kind of a level
This way it becomes a combination of signal lines and levels that are trying to combine both the good from both methods.
In simple terms, DSL uses the concept of a signal line and betters it by inheriting the previous signal line's value & makes it a level.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C ATR-Stepped PDFMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C ATR-Stepped PDFMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX as shown on the chart
Confirmation 1: GKD-V ATR-Stepped PDFMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V ATR-Stepped PDFMA
ATR-Stepped PDF MA is and ATR-stepped moving average that uses a probability density function moving average.
What is Probability Density Function?
Probability Density Function (PDF) is a statistical function used to describe the likelihood of a continuous random variable taking on a particular value or range of values. In other words, it describes the probability distribution of a random variable over a continuous range of values.
The PDF is defined as the derivative of the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of a continuous random variable. The CDF of a continuous random variable is the probability that the random variable takes on a value less than or equal to a given value. The PDF is a non-negative function that integrates to 1 over the entire range of the random variable.
The PDF is used to calculate the probability of the random variable taking on a value within a specific range. This is done by integrating the PDF over that range. The height of the PDF at a particular value of the random variable indicates the relative likelihood of that value occurring.
The PDF is an essential tool in many areas of statistics, including hypothesis testing, confidence interval estimation, and Bayesian inference.
Probability density function based MA is a sort of weighted moving average that uses probability density function to calculate the weights.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C T3 Velocity [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C T3 Velocity is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V T3 Velocity as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V T3 Velocity
What is T3?
The T3 Moving Average (T3MA) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by Tim Tillson. It is a trend-following indicator that aims to provide a smoother and more accurate representation of price trends than other moving average indicators.
The T3MA is a type of exponential moving average (EMA) that is calculated using a series of complex formulas. Unlike a simple or exponential moving average, which use fixed smoothing factors, the T3MA uses a variable smoothing factor that is based on the volatility of the underlying asset. This means that the T3MA is able to adapt to changing market conditions and provide more accurate signals.
The formula for calculating the T3MA is as follows:
T3 = a * EMA1 + (1 - a) * T3
Where:
-T3 is the current value of the T3MA
-EMA1 is the current value of the first EMA
-T3 is the previous value of the T3MA
-a is the smoothing factor, which is based on the volatility of the underlying asset and is calculated using the following formulas:
-c1 = -1 + exp(-sqrt(2) * pi / period)
-c2 = 2 * c1 * c1 + 2 * c1
-c3 = 1 - c1 - c2
-a = c1 * sqrt(period) * (close - T3 ) + c2 * T3 + c3 * EMA1
In simple terms, the T3MA is calculated by taking a weighted average of two different EMAs, with the weight given to each EMA depending on the volatility of the asset being analyzed. The T3MA is then smoothed using a second smoothing factor, which further reduces noise and improves the accuracy of the indicator.
The T3MA can be used in a variety of ways by traders and analysts. Some common applications include using the T3MA as a trend-following indicator, with buy signals generated when the price of an asset crosses above the T3MA and sell signals generated when the price crosses below. The T3MA can also be used in combination with other indicators and analytical techniques to confirm trading decisions and identify potential trend reversals.
Overall, the T3 Moving Average is a highly sophisticated and complex technical indicator that is designed to provide a more accurate and reliable representation of price trends. While it may be difficult for novice traders to understand and use effectively, experienced traders and analysts may find the T3MA to be a valuable tool in their trading toolbox.
What is Velocity?
Velocity can have different meanings depending on the context. Here are a few definitions:
In physics, velocity is a measure of the rate and direction of motion of an object. It is typically expressed in meters per second (m/s) or another unit of distance divided by time.
In finance and economics, velocity refers to the speed at which money circulates in an economy. It is usually measured as the ratio of gross domestic product (GDP) to the money supply.
In trading, velocity can refer to the speed and magnitude of price movements. It can be used as an indicator of momentum or trend strength.
What is T3 Velocity?
T3 Velocity is a better performing MACD that uses different hot (alpha) values for the slow and fast period inputs.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Swing Line [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Swing Line is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Swing Line as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Swing Line
The swing line indicator is a technical analysis tool used in financial markets to identify the direction of a trend. It is also known as the trendline or zigzag indicator.
The swing line indicator plots a series of lines connecting the highs and lows of price movements over a given time period. Each line represents a swing high or swing low in the price action, depending on whether the trend is bullish or bearish.
In an uptrend, the swing line indicator connects each successive higher low, forming an ascending trendline. In a downtrend, the indicator connects each successive lower high, forming a descending trendline. When the trend changes direction, the indicator will create a new line to reflect the new swing high or low.
Traders use the swing line indicator to identify key levels of support and resistance, as well as potential entry and exit points for trades. A break of the trendline can signal a potential trend reversal, while a bounce off the trendline can indicate that the trend is still intact.
The swing line indicator can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to confirm trends and reduce false signals. It is commonly used in forex, stock, and commodity markets, and is available on most charting platforms.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Jurik Smoother [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Jurik Smoother is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Jurik Smoother as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Jurik Smoother
Jurik Smoother (JS) is a smoothing function that reduces noise and false signals in price data. It is based on a weighted moving average that assigns more weight to recent data points and less weight to older data points. This helps to eliminate sudden price spikes and gaps in the data, making it easier to identify trends and patterns.
Jurik Smoother (JS) is a type of oscillator that was developed by Mark Jurik to reduce the noise and false signals that can be present in financial data. It is designed to be more responsive to changes in price trends than traditional oscillators, while also being less susceptible to whipsaw signals.
The Jurik Smoother is calculated using a weighted moving average that assigns more weight to recent data points and less weight to older data points. This means that it places greater emphasis on current price action, while smoothing out any erratic movements that could be caused by random fluctuations in the data.
One of the key features of the Jurik Smoother is its ability to adapt to changing market conditions. Unlike traditional oscillators, which use a fixed number of data points in their calculation, the Jurik Smoother adjusts its length based on the current volatility of the market. This helps to reduce lag time and increase the accuracy of the indicator in identifying trends.
The Jurik Smoother can be used in a variety of ways, including identifying trends, support and resistance levels, and potential entry and exit points for trades. It is particularly useful in markets that are prone to sudden price spikes and gaps, such as cryptocurrency and forex markets.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA
What is Jurik Filter?
The Jurik Filter is a technical analysis tool that is used to filter out market noise and identify trends in financial markets. It was developed by Mark Jurik in the 1990s and is based on a non-linear smoothing algorithm that provides a more accurate representation of price movements.
Traditional moving averages, such as the Simple Moving Average (SMA) or Exponential Moving Average (EMA), are linear filters that produce a lag between price and the moving average line. This can cause false signals during periods of market volatility, which can result in losses for traders and investors.
The Jurik Filter is designed to address this issue by incorporating a damping factor into the smoothing algorithm. This damping factor adjusts the filter's responsiveness to the changes in price, allowing it to filter out market noise without overshooting price peaks and valleys.
The Jurik Filter is calculated using a mathematical formula that takes into account the current and past prices of an asset, as well as the volatility of the market. This formula incorporates the damping factor and produces a smoother price curve than traditional moving average filters.
One of the advantages of the Jurik Filter is its ability to adjust to changing market conditions. The damping factor can be adjusted to suit different securities and time frames, making it a versatile tool for traders and investors.
Traders and investors often use the Jurik Filter in conjunction with other technical analysis tools, such as the MACD or RSI, to confirm or complement their trading strategies. By filtering out market noise and identifying trends in the financial markets, the Jurik Filter can help improve the accuracy of trading signals and reduce the risks of false signals during periods of market volatility.
Overall, the Jurik Filter is a powerful technical analysis tool that can help traders and investors make more informed decisions about buying and selling securities. By providing a smoother price curve and reducing false signals, it can help improve trading performance and reduce risk in volatile markets.
What is Jurik Volatility?
Jurik Volatility is a technical analysis indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the volatility of financial markets. It is designed to provide a more accurate measure of market volatility than other traditional volatility indicators, such as the Average True Range (ATR) or Standard Deviation.
The Jurik Volatility indicator uses a non-linear smoothing algorithm that filters out market noise and provides a more accurate representation of price movements. It is calculated by taking the difference between the current price and a moving average of prices, and then applying a damping factor to adjust the responsiveness of the indicator to changes in volatility.
The damping factor used in the Jurik Volatility indicator adjusts the speed at which the indicator responds to changes in volatility. This makes it more responsive during periods of high volatility and less responsive during periods of low volatility. This helps to filter out false signals and provides a more accurate representation of market volatility.
One of the advantages of the Jurik Volatility indicator is its ability to adjust to changing market conditions. The damping factor can be adjusted to suit different securities and time frames, making it a versatile tool for traders and investors.
Traders and investors often use the Jurik Volatility indicator to identify periods of high and low volatility in financial markets. It can help traders to adjust their trading strategies to suit different market conditions, and to manage their risk by adjusting their stop loss orders or position sizes.
Overall, the Jurik Volatility indicator is a useful tool for traders and investors who want to measure market volatility and make informed decisions about buying and selling securities. It can help to improve the accuracy of trading signals and reduce the risks of false signals during periods of market volatility.
What is the EMA?
The Exponential Moving Average (EMA) is a popular technical analysis indicator that gives more weight to recent price data than older data. It is a type of moving average that is calculated by applying a weighting factor to the price data based on the number of periods selected for the EMA calculation.
The formula for calculating the EMA is:
EMA = (Price(t) x Smoothing factor) + EMA(y) x (1 - Smoothing factor)
where:
-Price(t) is the current price
-EMA(y) is the EMA value for the previous period
-Smoothing factor = 2 / (Number of periods + 1)
The smoothing factor is used to give more weight to recent prices and less weight to older prices, with the weight decreasing exponentially over time. This makes the EMA more responsive to price changes than a simple moving average.
The EMA can be used to identify trend direction and potential reversals in the market. Traders often use EMAs of different periods to confirm trend direction and make trading decisions.
What is Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA?
This indicator combines Jurik Filter with Jurik Volatility to form an crete an alpha value that is then injected into the EMA calculation to create an adaptive EMA.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
Strategy Developer ToolSolar Strategies: Strategy Developer Tool Complete Guide
This guide provides full explanation of the intended purpose of our script along with individual explanation of each input and the logic behind them coupled with general knowledge which we find useful in using our tool regarding elements of risk and strategy. Use this information wisely and understand we are not providing financial advise, this is a learning tool meant to help advance traders knowledge of the markets and their strategies which are formed as such.
Basics
Before getting into the specifics of how to use our strategy developer tool, it's important to understand a few basic fundamental things about it. The purpose of the tool is to allow the user to optimize a strategy through back testing with our strategy tracker and 50+ user inputs. The way you optimize your strategy depends on a couple things:
The state of the current and recent previous market.
The timeframe you trade on.
The types of trades you prefer. (swings, scalps, etc.)
How much risk you are willing to take on.
Risk Basics:
Going off the last bullet point on the list above, risk plays a huge part in how you optimize your strategy, with that being said here are a few general rules of risk as they relate to trades:
The more trades you take on, the more risk you are opening your strategy up to.
If done correctly, more trades will often result in more profit with slightly lower accuracy, and more risk.
The less trades you take on, the easier it is to have higher accuracy because ideally by rooting out the losing trades, you are left with fewer overall trades but mostly winning trades.
Less trades with higher accuracy often result in less profit but will 100% be less risky than the opposite. (More trades, less accurate, more profit, MORE RISK)
Input Basics:
More trades, less trades, more risk, less risk, what does this all mean as it relates to our tool?
The 50+ user inputs that allow you to optimize and create your strategy all effect when the script takes a trade.
Many of the inputs are essentially conditions. By changing these inputs, what you are doing is changing how specific the conditions need to be in order to take a trade.
This is how the inputs tie into the bullet point list above regarding risk and the number of trades you take on. By raising or lowering certain inputs, you are making the conditions more or less specific on when to trade.
Making conditions more specific will allow for less trades to be taken and will often result in a higher win rate, and less associated risk.
Making conditions less specific will allow for more trades to be taken and depending on the state of the market, could result in more profit being realized, but at the same time opens you up to more risk because you are stating a more general set of conditions in order to take a trade.
How does it work?
Our strategy developer tool is based on two simple factors in order to identify specific areas in the market deemed good for trade. They are as follows:
Directional momentum to identify when a move might happen.
A confirmation of the desired move.
Indicators:
The tool gets its information on these two factors from two custom built indicators which are hard coded into the script. These two indicators and the inputs which affect them can be found labeled with Indicator 1 or Indicator 2 in the tool's settings.
When the conditions are met based on the factors of both indicators, it then decides your stop losses and take profits using pivot points.
Indicator 1 is the momentum indicator.
Indicator 2 looks for confirmation of the move.
Hedges:
Since nothing is ever certain when trading, our tool also aims to minimize potential loss before it can happen by incorporating hedges when a signal prints in the opposite direction of the trade you are currently in.
To identify when to hedge, the candles will appear with the opposite color of your original trade. Candles, while in a long trade, appear as green and candles while in a short trade appear as red. While in a long trade the only time red candles will appear is when a hedge occurs and vice versa for shorts.
Example: If you just took a long trade based on a long signal that the script gave off, but a short signal prints off while you are in the long, you are directed to sell half your long position and enter that half into a short position. Since there is now more uncertainty in the long because of the short signal, minimizing your position size and having a smaller position in the opposite direction allows you to cover your bases if the trade moves against you. If it doesn’t move against you and ends up going long as originally intended, you are not to lose any money, likely a small profit or break even when all is said and done.
In order to give the hedges a greater change of hitting, the take profits are smaller than a normal trade, this way even if your hedge wasn’t necessary and the original trade does not move against you, it's likely that your hedge will still win, and you can just consider it a small scalp to further your profits on the original trade.
Doubles:
Besides minimizing loss, we also aim to maximize the potential gain. When a second signal prints off in the direction of the trade you are currently already in, the tool directs you to double your position size.
The signal for doubling is a label with “2x” written inside.
The logic here is similar to hedging but in the opposite way. Just as a signal in the opposite direction creates uncertainty, a signal in the same direction indicates more certainty hence doubling your position size.
Example: If you are currently in a long position and you get a second long signal, you would then double your existing position since two long signals printing off before the first one has a chance to play out indicates a stronger chance of movement in the intended direction of your trade.
User Inputs
Upon opening the tools settings tab, you will find all the user inputs which can then be modified to fit your desired strategy. In this section of our guides, you will find individual explanations and use cases for each input so you can correctly use them to your best advantage.
Strategy Tracker Table:
By ticking this input on, the strategy tracker table will be visible to the user. (Default is on)
Indicator 1 Greater Than: Long:
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a long. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall above a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too low because this would indicate prolonged downwards movement on the timeframe of the market being observed, making a long position riskier.
Indicator 1 Greater Than Input: Long:
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Greater Than: Long is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a long position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall above the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Less Than: Long
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a long position. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall below a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too high, because this would indicate a prior significant upwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a long position while the average momentum is at higher levels exposes the risk of longing as the market has started to pull back from a peak or when the market has just reached a peak.
Indicator 1 Less Than Input: Long
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Less Than: Long is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a long position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall below the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Greater Than: Short
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a short. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall above a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too low because this would indicate prolonged downwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a short position while the average momentum is at lower levels exposes the risk of shorting as the market has started to recover from a bottom or when the market has just reached a bottom.
Indicator 1 Greater Than Input: Short
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Greater Than: Short is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a short position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall above the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Less Than: Short
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a short position. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall below a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too high, because this would indicate a prior significant upwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a short position while the average momentum is at higher levels exposes the risk of shorting as the market is currently in a strong uptrend.
Indicator 1 Less Than: Short
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Less Than: Short is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a short position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall below the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short
This grouping of inputs is best used as a filter of sorts, much like many of the other inputs which are also essentially filters of the market to find areas ripe for trade. Specifically, however, this group of inputs is especially powerful because if used correctly, it can specify a range for the average momentum to fall in when looking for either long or short trades. Think of it like a sweet spot where the average is not too high nor too low. In combination with the numerous other inputs which will shortly be explained, this sweet spot can be a great indication. Keep in mind that once you find a working range, this will not last forever. Conditions in the market are ever changing and as such your inputs, in this case the range the average momentum must fall in, will also need to change with the market conditions.
Bars Since Crossover:
This input simply describes a crossover of the momentum indicator (indicator 1) and its average.
In the category How does it work? Two main factors are discussed, the first being directional momentum to determine when an upwards move might happen. The crossover correlated to this input is the directional momentum as mentioned earlier.
As also mentioned in How does it work? The second factor is a confirmation of the desired upwards move. This confirmation is a crossover of the current price and indicator 2 which will be further addressed later on.
What's important to understand about the two key factors at play in regard to Bars Since Crossover is that this input is determining a condition which looks for a certain number of bars prior to the confirmation of indicator 2 which the crossover of momentum and its average has happened on indicator 1.
Example: Bars Since Crossover input is set to 10. This means that the crossover of momentum and its average from indicator 1 must be within 10 bars prior to the confirmation from indicator 2. If this happens then this condition is met for a long position.
Bars Since Crossunder:
This input simply describes a crossunder of the momentum indicator (indicator 1) and its average.
In the category How does it work? Two main factors are discussed, the first being directional momentum to determine when a downwards move might happen. The crossunder correlated to this input is the directional momentum as mentioned earlier.
As also mentioned in How does it work? The second factor is a confirmation of the desired downwards move. This confirmation is a crossunder of the current price and indicator 2 which will be further addressed later on.
What's important to understand about the two key factors at play in regard to Bars Since Crossunder is that this input is determining a condition which looks for a certain number of bars prior to the confirmation of indicator 2 which the crossunder of momentum and its average has happened on indicator 1.
Example: Bars Since Crossunder input is set to 10. This means that the crossunder of momentum and its average from indicator 1 must be within 10 bars prior to the confirmation from indicator 2. If this happens then this condition is met for a short position.
Summary of Input Group: Bars Since Crossover/Crossunder
These two inputs can have a large effect on the types of trades being taken and the risk which your strategy opens up to. The idea is that in order for the two key factors described in How does it work? to be correlated and therefore indicate a strong directional move, the two events must happen within a somewhat small period of time. If the period of time between the two events taking place is too large, then it's riskier for your strategy due to a delay in directional momentum and the necessary confirmation. It's important to note that this “small period of time” is relative to the security you're trading and the timeframe its being trades on. Small could mean 5 bars in some cases or 20 bars in others, this is why our custom back tester exists. So that the process of optimization on different securities and different timeframes is smooth and only requires adjustments to inputs then your own analysis of the back test results.
Indicator 1 Input Long
Defines how strong the upwards momentum needs to be in order to take a long position.
When optimizing your strategy, this input is likely to have some of the most effect on when the script takes a long position.
The reasoning for this is because the level you set for this input is the level which indicator 1 must close above following the crossover of its average.
Example: Indicator 1 Input Long set to 50, this means that when the momentum crosses over its average from indicator 1, upon the close of this crossover the momentum must be above the level 50 in order for this condition to be met to take a long position.
The higher the level, the stronger the upwards momentum must be, and therefore by using higher levels for this input, the script will search for stronger directional moves leaving less chance for the trade to move against you.
Indicator 1 Input Short
Defines how strong the downwards momentum needs to be in order to take a short position.
When optimizing your strategy, this input is likely to have some of the most effect on when the script takes a short position.
The reasoning for this is because the level you set for this input is the level which indicator 1 must close below following the crossunder of its average.
Example: Indicator 1 Input Short set to 40, this means that when the momentum crosses under its average from indicator 1, upon the close of this crossunder the momentum must be below the level 40 in order for this condition to be met to take a short position.
The lower the level, the stronger the downwards momentum must be, and therefore by using lower levels for this input, the script will search for stronger directional moves leaving less chance for the trade to move against you.
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 1 Input Long/Short
These two inputs are so important to your strategy because at the end of the day no matter how you set it up, it's still a momentum-based strategy. With that being said the level of momentum or the strength needed in order to take trades is of course going to be a key decider in the successfulness of the strategy. When optimizing these two inputs make sure to take into account what the overall market conditions are, meaning if it’s a bull market maybe make the momentum needed to take a long slightly less comparatively to the amount needed to take a short, in other words make long conditions less specific and short conditions more specific. Slight variations of this input can have very big effects, even changing it by 1 or 2 can make a major difference. In might even be good to consider starting optimization with these inputs and then work the rest of the strategy out from there. A lot could be said about these inputs and more docs will be added in order to further explain more strategy approaches revolving around them, for now don’t hesitate to ask any questions.
Indicator 2 Red
This input is used as a sort of chop filter at its base level, however if used correctly it can be a much broader filter for what areas of the market you want to trade in.
Indicator 2 shows as either red or green and is used as a confirmation when price crosses over it following the crossover of momentum and its average from indicator 1 to take a long position.
If ticked on, Indicator 2 Red states a condition in order for the script to take a long position. (Default is on)
The condition is that upon the crossover of the current price and Indicator 2, 10 bars ago indicator 2 must have been red.
The reason for this input is because the current color of indicator 2 upon the crossover must also be red. However, this condition is hard coded in and cannot be changed by any input.
This is because the type of trade being targeted is that of a type of reversal or continuation.
If indicator 2 showed green 10 bars ago and is currently red this would indicate that a top was just reached, and price is reversing downwards making this not a good area to take a long.
Another scenario if indicator 2 showed green 10 bars ago and is currently red is that there is currently a sideways trend going on or otherwise known as chop, also not an ideal area to take a long
However, if 10 bars ago indicator 2 was red and it's currently red this would indicate a more prolonged pullback.
If all conditions are met and we know that price has been pulling back, now we can enter a long with more knowledge pointing to price reversing upwards from a downwards trend, or continuing its upwards trend after a pullback.
Indicator 2 Green
This input is used as a sort of chop filter at its base level, however if used correctly it can be a much broader filter for what areas of the market you want to trade in.
Indicator 2 shows as either red or green and is used as a confirmation when price crosses under it following the crossunder of momentum and its average from indicator 1 to take a short position.
If ticked on, Indicator 2 Green states a condition in order for the script to take a short position. (Default is on)
The condition is that upon the crossunder of the current price and Indicator 2, 10 bars ago indicator 2 must have been green.
The reason for this input is because the current color of indicator 2 upon the crossunder must also be green. However, this condition is hard coded in and cannot be changed by any input.
This is because the type of trade being targeted is that of a type of reversal or continuation.
If indicator 2 showed red 10 bars ago and is currently green this would indicate that a bottom was just reached, and price is reversing upwards making this not a good area to take a short.
Another scenario if indicator 2 showed red 10 bars ago and is currently green is that there is currently a sideways trend going on or otherwise known as chop, also not an ideal area to take a short.
However, if 10 bars ago indicator 2 was green and it's currently green this would indicate a more prolonged upwards movement.
If all conditions are met and we know that price has been moving up, now we can enter a short with more knowledge pointing to price reversing downwards from an upwards trend, or continuing its downwards trend after a bounce up.
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 2 Red/Green
Similar to Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short, the goal of these inputs is to try to get a picture of what the previous recent market has been doing. By getting this picture it's easier to find different areas of the market more ideal for trades. Different from Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short though, Indicator 2 Red/Green is directly correlated to the price action in the market rather than the momentum. By switching these on or off you are setting more or less specific conditions for taking trades. Some markets require this extra condition to lower your risk in your strategy, however others may not.
Pivot Low
This input is used to define the number of bars the script will look back to grab a pivot low when taking a long position.
This pivot low is then used to set the stop loss when entering a long position.
This input is very important and optimizing it correctly can be extremely crucial to your strategies success.
The Strategy Developer tool uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio when setting your first take profit point, so when the script looks back to get a pivot low based on the input you set, it will then set your first take profit at an equal ratio to the stop loss found from the pivot low.
The goal in optimizing this input is to give enough lookback to find real pivot points where price has reversed off of, but not to give too much lookback where its grabbing previous pivot points unrelated to the current move of momentum the script is giving a long signal from.
Consider the type of trades you're looking for in your strategy and what timeframe you are trying to trade on.
Longer swing trades which aim to catch bigger moves in the market, possibly on higher time frames, may require a further lookback in order to get your take profits in the correct positioning to catch the desired move, and not exit early before the trade has fully played out.
Shorter scalp trades may aim to catch smaller moves and therefore you don’t want to allow for too much risk by having a large stop loss and large take profits as a result.
Pivot Low 2
Pivot low 2 can be thought of as a backup lookback in order to get the correct pivot low.
In an input which will be discussed shortly called Pivot Low Minimum, you can set a minimum percentage for your pivot low to be, if the pivot low does not meet the minimum then the script will look to Pivot Low 2’s input to use as a bar lookback in order to get the correct pivot low.
This input is used because you might find a Pivot Low input that works well for the majority of the trades in your back tested strategy, however, there will always be outliers and when this Pivot Low input falls short of getting the correct level to put your stop losses at, Pivot Low 2 is used.
Pivot Low 2’s input should always be higher than Pivot Low’s input, that way you can allow the script to look back further in time to find the correct level when the minimum is not met.
Pivot High
This input is used to define the number of bars the script will look back to grab a pivot high when taking a short position.
This pivot high is then used to set the stop loss when entering a short position.
This input is very important and optimizing it correctly can be extremely crucial to your strategies success.
The Strategy Developer tool uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio when setting your first take profit point, so when the script looks back to get a pivot high based on the input you set, it will then set your first take profit at an equal ratio to the stop loss found from the pivot high.
The goal in optimizing this input is to give enough lookback to find real pivot points where price has reversed off of, but not to give too much lookback where its grabbing previous pivot points unrelated to the current move of momentum the script is giving a short signal from.
Consider the type of trades you're looking for in your strategy and what timeframe you are trying to trade on.
Longer swing trades which aim to catch bigger moves in the market, possibly on higher time frames, may require a further lookback in order to get your take profits in the correct positioning to catch the desired move, and not exit early before the trade has fully played out.
Shorter scalp trades may aim to catch smaller moves and therefore you don’t want to allow for too much risk by having a large stop loss and large take profits as a result.
Pivot High 2
Pivot high 2 can be thought of as a backup lookback in order to get the correct pivot high.
In an input which will be discussed shortly called Pivot High Minimum, you can set a minimum percentage for your pivot high to be, if the pivot high does not meet the minimum then the script will look to Pivot High 2’s input to use as a bar lookback in order to get the correct pivot high.
This input is used because you might find a Pivot High input that works well for the majority of the trades in your back tested strategy, however, there will always be outliers and when this Pivot High input falls short of getting the correct level to put your stop losses at, Pivot High 2 is used.
Pivot High 2’s input should always be higher than Pivot High’s input, that way you can allow the script to look back further in time to find the correct level when the minimum is not met.
Pivot Low Risk Tolerance
This input is very important in managing the risk associated with your strategy.
Pivot Low Risk Tolerance is defining a maximum percentage the pivot low can be away from your entry.
Since the pivot low that’s found is assigned to your stop loss and directly affects the placement of your take profits when taking a long position, making sure the pivot low isn’t too far down is crucial.
Depending on the types of trades you're aiming to take, the timeframe you choose to trade on, and the leverage you use in your strategy, you may want to assign a higher risk tolerance or a lower one.
Example: Pivot Low Risk Tolerance input set to 3, this means that when all other conditions are met in order to take a long position, when searching for the pivot low in order to set a stop loss, if the script finds the pivot low is greater than 3% away from the entry point, it will not take the trade.
Pivot High Risk Tolerance
This input is very important in managing the risk associated with your strategy.
Pivot High Risk Tolerance is defining a maximum percentage the pivot high can be away from your entry.
Since the pivot high that’s found is assigned to your stop loss and directly affects the placement of your take profits when taking a short position, making sure the pivot high isn’t too far up is crucial.
Depending on the types of trades you're aiming to take, the timeframe you choose to trade on, and the leverage you use in your strategy, you may want to assign a higher risk tolerance or a lower one.
Example: Pivot High Risk Tolerance input set to 3, this means that when all other conditions are met in order to take a short position, when searching for the pivot high in order to set a stop loss, if the script finds the pivot high is greater than 3% away from the entry point, it will not take the trade.
Pivot Low Minimum
Sometimes when searching for the pivot low, the script's defined lookback may not be enough to find the proper pivot point.
This can cause improper placement of stop losses and take profits and may cause trades to be exited early before they can fully play out in your favor.
Pivot Low Minimum is an input used to combat this problem, when the script finds a pivot low that does not meet the minimum percentage away from the entry point, it will then turn to Pivot Low 2 input in order to gain a further lookback and grab the correct pivot point to set your stop loss and take profits with.
When reading and setting this input, understand that setting it to 1 means there is no minimum, setting it to 0.9 would mean the minimum is a 10% difference between the pivot low and your entry point.
Think of it in terms of decimals and their equivalent percentage, 0.1 is equal to 10%, 0.01 is equal to 1%.
Whatever percentage you want to set for a minimum, convert it to a decimal, then simply subtract it from 1.
Example: Say you desire a 1.5% minimum pivot low and as a result an equivalent stop loss of 1.5% below your long entry and furthermore a take profit 1.5% above your long entry since the script uses a 1:1 ratio. Converting 1.5% to a decimal would give you 0.015, then subtracting it from 1 would give you 0.985, this would be the input assigned to Pivot Low Minimum.
Pivot High Minimum
Sometimes when searching for the pivot high, the script's defined lookback may not be enough to find the proper pivot point.
This can cause improper placement of stop losses and take profits and may cause trades to be exited early before they can fully play out in your favor.
Pivot High Minimum is an input used to combat this problem, when the script finds a pivot high that does not meet the minimum percentage away from the entry point, it will then turn to Pivot High 2 input in order to gain a further lookback and grab the correct pivot point to set your stop loss and take profits with.
When reading and setting this input, understand that setting it to 1 means there is no minimum, setting it to 0.9 would mean the minimum is a 10% difference between the pivot high and your entry point.
Think of it in terms of decimals and their equivalent percentage, 0.1 is equal to 10%, 0.01 is equal to 1%.
Whatever percentage you want to set for a minimum, convert it to a decimal, then simply subtract it from 1.
Example: Say you desire a 1.5% minimum pivot high and as a result an equivalent stop loss of 1.5% above your short entry and furthermore a take profit 1.5% below your short entry since the script uses a 1:1 ratio. Converting 1.5% to a decimal would give you 0.015, then subtracting it from 1 would give you 0.985, this would be the input assigned to Pivot High Minimum.
Summary of Input Group: Pivot Low/High - Pivot Low/High 2 – Pivot Low/High Risk Tolerance – Pivot Low/High Minimum
The first key takeaway from all these inputs is that your stop losses and take profits will be directly affected through optimizing any of them. The second key takeaway is that these inputs are crucial in managing the risk in your strategy, and while this has been said many times throughout the guide for various inputs, when it comes to stop losses and take profits it is especially true. Having a stop loss which is too high opens up the possibility for much bigger losses, and as a result your take profits will also be too high, minimizing the chance of any of them being hit. Having a stop loss which is too low increases the chance that your trade will get stopped out preemptively, before the trade can mature and move in your favor because remember that trades will not always move immediately in the intended direction, a good amount of patience is often involved in creating consistent successful trades and a successful strategy as such. On the same note, too low of a stop loss could also mean you are missing out on unrealized profit since your take profits are a direct result of the stop loss which is found. When optimizing your pivot low/high risk tolerance, think not about how much you are willing to lose on a single trade, but how much your portfolio can actually afford to lose not just on a single trade but multiple trades, sometimes even in a row. Obviously, the goal in creating a strategy is that you avoid losing trades and especially multiple in a row, however, there are many things that can’t be accounted for. The only way to manage this unaccounted risk is to use proper risk management and not open yourself up to big losses even in the worst most unlikely scenarios. Even if you don’t lose multiple trades in a row, ask yourself, could I afford to lose multiple trades with the risk tolerance I have set if everything were to go to $hit, (hopefully it would not), but in the off chance it did, instead of beating yourself up over what you did wrong, you’ll be patting yourself on the back for what you did right.
TP2-4 Long Placement
The first thing to understand about the take profit placement is that our system of stop losses and take profits uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio for the first stop loss and first take profit.
This means that if your stop loss falls 2% below your long entry, your first take profit will be 2% above your long entry, hence 1:1.
As for take profits 2-4, they are just extensions of that ratio. This means that if TP2 Long Placement is set to 1.5, the ratio for your second take profit is 1:1.5.
Using the same percentage from the second bullet point being 2%, we can now gather that with a 1:1.5 ratio our second take profit would be at 3% above our long entry.
The same applies for the rest of the take profits, meaning whatever the take profit is set at regardless of which one, apply that number to the second placeholder of the ratio.
Example: First stop loss falls 2% below long entry. TP2 Long Placement input set to 1.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:1.5; corresponding percentage would be a 3% gain. TP3 Long Placement input set to 2; risk to reward ratio is 1:2; corresponding percentage would be a 4% gain. TP4 Long Placement input set to 2.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:2.5; corresponding percentage would be a 5% gain.
The next key thing to understand about the trailing take profits system is the position size being sold at each take profit and therefore how the strategy tracker calculates your strategy's profit.
At the first take profit, 50% of your position is being calculated as sold, locking in good profits off the bat.
At TP2, 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving a remaining 30% open to gain more profit.
At TP3, another 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving 10% to collect any additional possible gains.
At TP4 the remaining 10% of your position is sold and the trade will be fully closed out.
SL2-4 Long Placement
Our system of trailing stop losses is completely similar to that of our trailing take profits.
Just like the trailing take profits, the inputs for stop losses 2-4 are also used as the second placeholders in the risk to reward ratio.
This may be confusing since generally stop losses are associated with a loss on your position, however, the only stop loss which results in a loss on your position is the first one, not stop losses 2-4.
This is because once your first take profit is hit on your long, your stop loss will automatically move up to the price equivalent to the ratio which you set using these inputs that lies in profit.
Example: Since your first take profit will always be at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio with your stop loss, your second take profit could be at a 1:0.8 ratio. So, to clarify, once your first take profit is hit at a 1:1, your original first stop loss will now be moved up in profits to just below your first take profit at a 1:0.8 risk to reward ratio. This only happens AFTER the first take profit is hit.
For stop losses 3 and 4, the same logic is true, once TP2 is hit, your second stop loss will now be moved up to the placement of SL3 which will fall somewhere below TP2. Once TP3 is hit, your third stop loss will now be moved up to the placement of SL4 which will fall somewhere below TP3. If stop loss 4 does not get hit, then the only thing left to happen is for TP4 to hit and the trade will fully close out.
The one major difference between our system of trailing stop losses and take profits is that no matter what stop loss is hit, the entire remainder of your position will be calculated as sold.
So, if your first take profit hits and sells 50% of your long position, but the trade does not continue upwards and moves down to your second stop loss, the remaining 50% of your position will be calculated as sold.
The same applies to SL3 and SL4, so at SL3 the remaining 30% of your position will be calculated as sold, and at SL4 the remaining 10% will be calculated as sold.
Your trailing stop loss placement is dependent on what types of trades you desire. For shorter scalps on smaller timeframes, it's recommended to place each stop loss just below each corresponding take profit for long trades.
This way you leave just enough room for the trade to continue upwards if there is enough momentum, but you don’t open yourself up to losing your unrealized profit if it does not make this continuation.
If you desire longer swing trades on higher timeframes, it might be a good idea to leave more room in between the take profit and corresponding stop loss.
This way you leave more room for the trade to mature and move in your favor since when trading longer moves, often they will not shoot straight up but rather have a series of small pullbacks throughout the more general upwards trend.
Note that when a long trade is first entered the only stop loss and take profit in play are your original stop loss found by the pivot low which would result in a loss, and the first take profit at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio from that pivot low.
TP2-4 Short Placement
The first thing to understand about the take profit placement is that our system of stop losses and take profits uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio for the first stop loss and first take profit.
This means that if your stop loss falls 2% above your short entry, your first take profit will be 2% below your short entry, hence, 1:1.
As for take profits 2-4, they are just extensions of that ratio. This means that if TP2 Short Placement is set to 1.5, the ratio for your second take profit is 1:1.5.
Using the same percentage from the second bullet point being 2%, we can now gather that with a 1:1.5 ratio our second take profit would be at 3% below our short entry.
The same applies for the rest of the take profits, meaning whatever the take profit is set at regardless of which one, apply that number to the second placeholder of the ratio.
Example: First stop loss falls 2% above short entry. TP2 Short Placement input set to 1.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:1.5; corresponding percentage would be a 3% gain. TP3 Short Placement input set to 2; risk to reward ratio is 1:2; corresponding percentage would be a 4% gain. TP4 Short Placement input set to 2.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:2.5; corresponding percentage would be a 5% gain.
The next key thing to understand about the trailing take profits system is the position size being sold at each take profit and therefore how the strategy tracker calculates your strategy's profit.
At the first take profit, 50% of your position is being calculated as sold, locking in good profits off the bat.
At TP2, 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving a remaining 30% open to gain more profit.
At TP3, another 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving 10% to collect any additional possible gains.
At TP4 the remaining 10% of your position is sold and the trade will be fully closed out.
SL2-4 Short Placement
Our system of trailing stop losses is completely similar to that of our trailing take profits.
Just like the trailing take profits, the inputs for stop losses 2-4 are also used as the second placeholders in the risk to reward ratio.
This may be confusing since generally stop losses are associated with a loss on your position, however, the only stop loss which results in a loss on your position is the first one, not stop losses 2-4.
This is because once your first take profit is hit on your short, your stop loss will automatically move down to the price equivalent to the ratio which you set using these inputs that lies in profit.
Example: Since your first take profit will always be at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio with your stop loss, your second take profit could be at a 1:0.8 ratio. So, to clarify, once your first take profit is hit at a 1:1, your original first stop loss will now be moved down in profits to just below your first take profit at a 1:0.8 risk to reward ratio. This only happens AFTER the first take profit is hit.
For stop losses 3 and 4, the same logic is true, once TP2 is hit, your second stop loss will now be moved down to the placement of SL3 which will fall somewhere above TP2. Once TP3 is hit, your third stop loss will now be moved down to the placement of SL4 which will fall somewhere above TP3. If stop loss 4 does not get hit, then the only thing left to happen is for TP4 to hit and the trade will fully close out.
The one major difference between our system of trailing stop losses and take profits is that no matter what stop loss is hit, the entire remainder of your position will be calculated as sold.
So, if your first take profit hits and sells 50% of your short position, but the trade does not continue downwards and moves up to your second stop loss, the remaining 50% of your position will be calculated as sold.
The same applies to SL3 and SL4, so at SL3 the remaining 30% of your position will be calculated as sold, and at SL4 the remaining 10% will be calculated as sold.
Your trailing stop loss placement is dependent on what types of trades you desire. For shorter scalps on smaller timeframes, it's recommended to place each stop loss just above each corresponding take profit for short trades.
This way you leave just enough room for the trade to continue downwards if there is enough momentum, but you don’t open yourself up to losing your unrealized profit if it does not make this continuation.
If you desire longer swing trades on higher timeframes, it might be a good idea to leave more room in between the take profit and corresponding stop loss.
This way you leave more room for the trade to mature and move in your favor since when trading longer moves, often they will not shoot straight down but rather have a series of small bounces throughout the more general downwards trend.
Note that when a short trade is first entered the only stop loss and take profit in play are your original stop loss found by the pivot high which would result in a loss, and the first take profit at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio from that pivot high.
Summary of Take Profit/Stop Loss Placement:
Correctly placed take profits and stop losses are essential in having a successful strategy and proper risk management. With that being said there are also many ways in which to use this system. Deciding how to set them up is really just a matter of determining the trading style you aim to succeed with. Once this has been determined, the placement of take profits and stop losses should be easier to configure. However, if there is any confusion on either of these topics as the ratios and corresponding TP/SL can get confusing, please do not hesitate to ask further questions in our discord!
Leverage Long
Leverage Long input simply defines the leverage used in your long positions, and is used in calculating the profit in Strategy Tracker
A rundown of risk associated with using leverage will not be given here since it should assume that if you're using leverage, you should already understand the risks.
If you are not using any leverage, then set Leverage Long input to 1.
Long Position Size
This input defines the position size you are using in your long trades.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Long Hedge Position Size
This input is used to define the position size of long hedge positions.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Important: Your Long Hedge Position Size should always be half of your Long Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Double Long Position Size
This input is used to define the position size when in a double long.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker
Important: Your Double Long Position Size should always be double your Long Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Short Position Size
This input defines the position size you are using in your short trades.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Short Hedge Position Size
This input is used to define the position size of short hedge positions.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Important: Your Short Hedge Position Size should always be half of your Short Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Double Short Position Size
This input is used to define the position size when in a double short.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker
Important: Your Double Short Position Size should always be double your Short Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
A Message From the Developer PLEASE READ!!!
If you have made it this far in the guide, I applaud you and thank you for sticking with it as I know there is a lot of information here! This is not an exaggeration when I say there are hundreds of millions of possible variations that could be applied throughout all the inputs which is why I much prefer to call this a tool rather than an algorithm. Algorithm is a loaded word in my opinion as it comes with an implication of guarantee in the trades being made. This is not meant to discourage anybody from taking trades based off the tool which is also why I provided the option for automated alerts which through third party software can turn into automated trades; if you have the confidence in your strategy by all means I encourage you to trade it, automated or not. Just please understand that it's highly recommended to also apply your own knowledge and analysis before taking a trade as historical back testing data has its limitations and cannot always account for current market conditions. The real applicability does not fall in what the back tester window is saying you would have made or how accurate your strategy would have been, it's within the sheer number of markets and scenarios this tool can be used in and the information you can get which a human just can’t comprehend all at once; its literally endless. I urge all of you to be creative and think outside the box about what you can do with such a powerful tool at your fingertips. After all this is the reason why so many inputs were provided. Another main goal of this project was to give users a better understanding of risk management. It can be hard to manage your risk when it’s all kept in your head, but when you can modify your strategy to better manage your risk by simply optimizing a few inputs, it’s a lot easier to comprehend and actually apply when trading. The last thing I want to say is have fun working through the possible learning curve in using this tool, it may be a process but enjoy it because the one thing I can guarantee is that you will come out the other side a better trader than before!
Self-Optimizing RSI Strategy [Kioseff Trading]Hello!
Introducing the Self-Optimizing RSI Strategy.
The indicator tests up to 800 RSI strategies simultaneously, looping through arrays, and auto plots the best performing parameter set.
The image above shows the result of 800 RSI strategies concurrently.
The table oriented bottom right shows the performance and risk metrics of the best performing RSI system tested across the bar set. Additionally, the conditions for entry and exit are displayed; for the image - a long entry system predicated on RSI crossunders and exit system predicated on a 1% TP and 2% SL are shown.
The indicator calculates numerous risk and performance metrics.
Calculated metrics include:
RSI Parameters
RSI Cross Entry Level
Total Trades
Win Rate
Avg. Gain for Winning Trades
Max Pain
PnL (Cumulative Performance)
Profit Factor
Avg. Loss for Losing Trades
Ratio Avg. Win / Avg. Loss
Avg. Bars in Trade
Max Drawdown
Current Drawdown
Open Position PnL
"Dynamic" indicates the performance of self-optimizing RSI system was tested.
The image above shows the performance of the greatest-performing RSI system - a fixed set of parameters - when adhering to a 1% TP and 2% fixed SL.
Trailing Stops and Profit-Taking Limit orders can be set/simulated.
The image above shows a dynamic entry level - plotted as a purple, non-transparent line.
The entry level "self-optimizes" to mimic the best performing RSI system at current time.
The image above exemplifies the functionality for all horizontal lines plotted on the chart.
The average RSI level achieved subsequent a profitable trade is shown.
The average RSI level achieved subsequent a losing trade is shown.
The entry level for RSI crossunders/crossovers is shown.
The image above show the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator recording entries & exits; gains & losses, for each executed trade.
You can "verify" trades manually.
Blue boxes reflect an entered position.
Green boxes reflect a closed, profitable trade.
Red boxes reflect a close, losing trade.
The percentage gain for a profitable trade is appended to green boxes; the percentage loss for a losing trade is appended to red boxes.
The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator plots off the chart; however, percentage gains/losses are measured against price, not RSI.
Boxes correlate to the interval a trade was entered/exited on.
The indicator hosts various methods to filter the outcome for testing.
For instance, you can:
Use trailing stops or fixed stop losses
Test RSI crossunders and crossovers
Configure the RSI settings that are tested (i.e. RSI 2 - 9, RSI 14 - 20, RSI 50 - 57)
Test short-based RSI Systems and long-based RSI systems
Simulate limit orders (Exit intrabar at fixed stop losses or trailing stop losses; exit intrabar at profit targets)
Require all tested RSIs to trend above or below their respective average (i.e. all RSIs must trend above/below their 50-interval EMA values. SMAs can also be used)
Use external indicators and require a user-defined value be exceeded, measured below, or that price exceed or measure below an indicator. The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator incorporates a few built-in technical indicators - ADX, %k, MFI, CMFI, and RSI. Consequently, you can require these indicators to measure above/below a specified level prior to entry. Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator. I'll show an example shortly.
Adjust the time window that's tested.
Adjust PT and SL percentages.
Override plot an RSI system to procure thorough statistics.
Require a symbol to measure above/Below or equal to a particular price level to “validate” a Long/Short entry signal. You can retrieve any data hosted by TradingView and require it measure above/below a user-defined level prior to entry. For instance, you can select "$VIX", and require the ticker to measure less than $30 prior to long/short entry. If "$VIX" measures greater than $30 prior to a long/short signal the position will not open. Alternatively, you can require a symbol to measure above a user-defined price prior to entry. If the retrieved ticker doesn't measure above the user-defined level prior to entry a trade will not open.
Use trailing stops or fixed stop losses
The image above shows results for 800 short-based RSI systems - using a trailing stop loss.
Test RSI crossunders and crossovers
The image shows results for 800 long-based RSI systems. Positions are entered subsequent to RSI crossovers.
You can select which RSI strategies are tested - you aren't not limited to testing RSI 2 - RSI 9 (:
Simulate limit orders (Exit intrabar at fixed stop losses or trailing stop losses; exit intrabar at profit targets)
The image above shows performance test results when exiting during the interval subsequent to the profit target being exceeded.
The image above shows performance test results when exiting during the interval subsequent to the stop loss being exceeded.
Require all tested RSIs to trend above or below their respective average (i.e. all RSIs must trend above/below their 50-interval EMA values. SMAs can also be used)
The image above shows an RSI EMA in addition to prerequisite condition. For each RSI strategy tested, the RSI used for the strategy must measure above an EMA of its values prior to entry. You can require RSI to measure below an EMA of its values prior to entry, use an SMA, and change the length of the MA used.
Use external indicators and require a user-defined value be exceeded, measured below, or that price exceed or measure below an indicator. The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator incorporates a few built-in technical indicators - ADX, %k, MFI, CMFI, and RSI. Consequently, you can require these indicators to measure above/below a specified level prior to entry. Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator. I'll show an example shortly.
The image above shows me requiring the ADX indicator to measure above "20" prior to long entry. Any of the built-indicators can be used with similar conditions; you can implement a custom-coded indicator for trade logic.
Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator.
The image above shows me retrieving the value for Volume Profile Point of Control - a TradingView coded indicator.
Consequently, I can require price to measure above/below the session's Poc prior to RSI long/short entry.
You can use this feature with any custom coded indicator providing historical plot values - something you or a favored author have coded.
]Adjust PT and SL percentages
The image above shows adjusted TP & SL percentages - optimize and reward/risk ratio you'd like (:
Override plot an RSI system to procure thorough statistics.
The image above shows manually plotted RSI parameters and a corresponding stat sheet.
Require a symbol to measure above/Below or equal to a particular price level to “validate” a Long/Short entry signal. You can retrieve any data hosted by TradingView and require it measure above/below a user-defined level prior to entry. For instance, you can select "$VIX", and require the ticker to measure less than $30 prior to long/short entry. If "$VIX" measures greater than $30 prior to a long/short signal the position will not open. Alternatively, you can require a symbol to measure above a user-defined price prior to entry. If the retrieved ticker doesn't measure above the user-defined level prior to entry a trade will not open.
The image above shows me requiring the ticker "$VIX" to measure below $30 prior to long/short entry. If %VIS measures greater than $30 when a long/short signal triggers a position will not be opened. Further refine your trading system with this feature - exploit correlations.
Adjust the time window that's tested.
The image above shows configurable start and end dates for the optimization period.
You won't be able to test 800 RSI strategies concomitantly on a 20,000 bar data set.
Consequently, for large data sets (intrasession data) you will have to narrow the optimization window to test a larger number of combinations.
You can test 80 (loads on all data sets), 144 (loads on all data sets), 264 (loads on ~15,000 bar data sets), 312 (loads on ~11,500 bar data sets) and 800 (loads on ~4950 bar data sets)combinations simultaneously. You can test 800 RSI strategies simultaneously on intrasession data; however, you'll likely have to narrow the tested time window.
I recently published a bar count script titled "Bar Count for Backtesting", you can access the script here:
The above script is useful for quickly calculating the number of bars in a time window, or the date for a bar that is "x" number of bars back. Therefore, implementing these scripts cooperatively should improve date selection efficiency (not arbitrarily selecting test start & end dates that fail to load).
I included a tool tip describing the near-maximum bars in a data set that the higher numbers of simultaneous RSI strategies can be tested on.
More to come; enjoy!
(P.S. The script uses private libraries and, consequently, is unable to be published open source)
An optimization script is best implemented to discover what won't work, not what will work. The best performing "optimized" parameters are not a guaranteed profitable investment system. While we may see an exceptionally positive performance for a set of parameters, it's impossible to know how much of that performance is the beneficiary of market noise in the absence of additional testing. Most market moves are noise - irreplicable sequences that offer no predictive utility - and most "good" backtests overwhelmingly benefit from these irreplicable sequences. An investor unfamiliar with this concept may be lead to believe they have found a valid correlation between an indicator sequence and subsequent price movement, despite the correlation being illusory.
Consequently, it should be assumed that the best performing parameters strongly benefitted from market noise and will not work in a live market - until further rigorous statistical tests are performed on an investment system built around the best performing parameters. This includes out-of-sample, in-sample, and forward testing in addition to testing negatively correlated, positively correlated and zero-correlation assets; testing additional assets should be treated as prerequisite to live implementation.
Of course, all trading strategies, even one's that methodically exploit a valid correlation/replicable sequence, will benefit from market noise - it's impossible to avoid. However, a "legit" trading strategy has a chance to work on future price data, while an overoptimized strategy will fail miserably on new price data!
An overoptimized strategy is virtually guaranteed to have a better backtest performance than a valid strategy. The overoptimized strategy will fail in a live market while the valid strategy has a chance of working. So, should you notice the best performing RSI parameters, be sure to build a comprehensive trading system around the parameters and perform additional tests. This is the only way to know if the optimized parameters will truly work in a live market!
Unfortunately, they often will not!
This publication does not constitute investment advice.
SNIPER ORB V3# 🎯 SNIPER ORB TRADING CHEAT SHEET
## Quick Reference Guide for Live Trading
---
## 📊 VISUAL IDENTIFICATION GUIDE
```
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
YOUR CHART AT A GLANCE
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
🔵 BRIGHT BLUE LINES (3px) → 5min ORB High/Low
🔷 CYAN LINES (2px) → 15min ORB High/Low
🟣 PURPLE LINES (2px) → 30min ORB High/Low (PRIMARY)
🟢 GREEN DASHED LINES (1px) → Upside targets (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
🔴 RED DASHED LINES (1px) → Downside targets (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
🟡 GOLD LINE (2px) → Anchored VWAP (9:30 AM anchor for NY, 3:00 AM for London)
📋 INFO TABLE (top-right) → Shows live ORB ranges, VWAP price, status
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
```
**KEY DIFFERENCE FROM OTHER ORB INDICATORS:**
- You see **ALL 3 ORB PERIODS SIMULTANEOUSLY** (5min, 15min, 30min)
- Targets calculated from **30min ORB ONLY** (not 5min or 15min)
- **NO BOX FILLS** - clean line-only display for sniper precision
- Auto-disappears at session end (no clutter from old sessions)
---
## 🔘 NEW FEATURE: ORB DISPLAY TOGGLES
**You now have FULL CONTROL over which ORB periods to display!**
```
In indicator settings → "ORB Display" section:
☑ Show 5min ORB → Toggle blue lines ON/OFF
☑ Show 15min ORB → Toggle cyan lines ON/OFF
☑ Show 30min ORB → Toggle purple lines ON/OFF
USE CASES:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
1. FOCUS MODE (30min only)
☐ 5min ☐ 15min ☑ 30min
→ Clean chart, just your primary trading range
→ Best for beginners or minimalist traders
2. EARLY WARNING MODE (5min + 30min)
☑ 5min ☐ 15min ☑ 30min
→ See early breaks with 5min, trade 30min confirmation
→ Reduces visual noise from 15min
3. CONFLUENCE MODE (all 3 ORBs)
☑ 5min ☑ 15min ☑ 30min
→ Maximum information, all alignment signals
→ For advanced traders seeking highest probability
4. INTRADAY SCALP MODE (5min only)
☑ 5min ☐ 15min ☐ 30min
→ Ultra-fast entries on 5min breaks
→ High-risk, high-frequency approach
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
💡 PRO TIP: Start with 30min only, then add 5min/15min as you gain experience
```
---
## 🎯 FIXED: ANCHORED VWAP (TIMESTAMP-BASED)
**The VWAP now anchors with SURGICAL PRECISION to the exact session start candle!**
```
LONDON SESSION:
• Anchors at the EXACT 3:00 AM ET candle
• Uses timestamp checking: hour == 3 AND minute == 0
• Resets every morning at London Open
NEW YORK SESSION:
• Anchors at the EXACT 9:30 AM ET candle
• Uses timestamp checking: hour == 9 AND minute == 30
• Resets every day at NY Open
WHAT THIS MEANS:
✅ VWAP starts accumulating from the first tick of the session
✅ No more "off by one bar" errors
✅ Institutional-grade VWAP anchoring
✅ Perfect alignment with your ORB start times
HOW TO VERIFY IT'S WORKING:
1. Load indicator on 1min or 5min chart
2. Find the exact 9:30 AM candle (NY) or 3:00 AM candle (London)
3. VWAP should START appearing from that exact bar
4. Not the bar before, not the bar after - THAT EXACT BAR
```
---
## ⏰ SESSION TIMING MATRIX
| Session | Start Time | 5min Complete | 15min Complete | 30min Complete | Session End |
|---------|-----------|---------------|----------------|----------------|-------------|
| **London** | 3:00 AM ET | 3:05 AM | 3:15 AM | 3:30 AM | 9:30 AM ET (disappears) |
| **New York** | 9:30 AM ET | 9:35 AM | 9:45 AM | 10:00 AM | 5:00 PM ET (disappears) |
**💡 GOLDEN RULES:**
1. **WAIT FOR 30MIN ORB TO COMPLETE** before trading targets (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
2. Use 5min and 15min ORBs as **early warning signals** only
3. All ORB lines + VWAP **auto-delete** at session end (clean chart)
---
## 🎯 THE 3-ORB SYSTEM: HOW IT WORKS
### **Hierarchical ORB Structure**
```
TIME: 9:30 AM ─────────────────────────────────> 10:00 AM ──────> 5:00 PM
↓ ↓
SESSION START 30min ORB COMPLETE
(all 3 ORBs begin forming) (targets appear)
📍 5min ORB (9:30-9:35 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: EARLY breakout signal, fastest-moving boundary
📍 15min ORB (9:30-9:45 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: MID-TERM institutional reference level
📍 30min ORB (9:30-10:00 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: PRIMARY TRADING RANGE - all targets calculated from this
🎯 TARGETS (10:00 AM onward): ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
Purpose: Profit-taking levels based on 30min range
```
**Why 3 ORBs Instead of 1?**
- **5min ORB**: Captures early institutional positioning (first 5 minutes)
- **15min ORB**: Confirms directional bias (more stable than 5min)
- **30min ORB**: Full market digestion of overnight news + opening orders
- **Confluence = Higher Win Rate**: When all 3 align, breakouts are extremely reliable
---
## 🎯 THE 5 HIGH-PROBABILITY SETUPS
### **SETUP #1: TRIPLE ORB BREAKOUT CONFLUENCE** ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
✅ Price breaks ALL 3 ORBs simultaneously:
• 5min high/low (blue line)
• 15min high/low (cyan line)
• 30min high/low (purple line)
✅ VWAP confirms direction (below price = bullish, above = bearish)
✅ Volume spike on breakout candle
ENTRY: Close of breakout candle (must close beyond ALL 3 ORBs)
STOP: Inside 30min ORB at 30m low (long) or 30m high (short)
TARGET 1: First green/red dashed line (0.5x 30m range)
TARGET 2: Second target (1x 30m range)
TARGET 3: Third target (1.5x 30m range)
WIN RATE: 75-85% | R:R = 1:2.5 minimum
NOTES: When all 3 ORBs align, institutional order flow is unanimous
```
---
### **SETUP #2: 5MIN EARLY BREAKOUT → 30MIN CONFIRMATION** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price breaks 5min ORB first (blue line crossed)
✅ 15min ORB holds initially (cyan line not crossed yet)
✅ After 30min ORB completes, price breaks 30min boundary (purple)
✅ VWAP alignment confirms direction
✅ All 3 ORBs now broken in same direction
ENTRY: When 30min ORB breaks (purple line) + 5min/15min already broken
STOP: 30min ORB opposite boundary
TARGET 1-3: Standard targets from 30min ORB
WIN RATE: 70-80% | R:R = 1:2+
NOTES: 5min gave early warning, 30min confirms institutional commitment
```
---
### **SETUP #3: FALSE 5MIN BREAKOUT → 30MIN REVERSAL** ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price breaks 5min ORB (blue line)
✅ Fails to break 15min or 30min ORBs (cyan/purple lines hold)
✅ Price reverses back inside 5min ORB
✅ Then breaks OPPOSITE side of 30min ORB (purple line)
✅ VWAP flips to confirm new direction
ENTRY: When 30min ORB breaks in OPPOSITE direction of failed 5min break
STOP: Failed 5min breakout high/low (now a liquidity grab zone)
TARGET 1-3: Standard targets
WIN RATE: 80-90% | R:R = 1:3+ (trapped traders forced to exit)
NOTES: Most profitable setup - 5min breakout was liquidity hunt
```
---
### **SETUP #4: TIGHT COMPRESSION → EXPLOSION** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ All 3 ORBs tightly overlapping (5m, 15m, 30m within 50 points on YM)
✅ Range < 0.3% of price (very tight consolidation)
✅ VWAP sitting in middle of compression
✅ 30min ORB complete, price still inside all 3
ENTRY: Simultaneous break of ALL 3 ORBs + VWAP cross
STOP: Middle of compression zone
TARGET: 2x-4x normal targets (volatility expansion)
WIN RATE: 65-75% | R:R = 1:5+ (explosive breakout)
NOTES: Low volatility → high volatility shift, institutions coiling spring
```
---
### **SETUP #5: VWAP BOUNCE WITHIN 30MIN ORB** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price stayed inside 30min ORB for 1+ hours post-formation
✅ VWAP acting as dynamic support (long) or resistance (short)
✅ Price bouncing between VWAP and 30min ORB boundaries
✅ Clear rejection candles at VWAP
ENTRY: When price bounces off VWAP toward 30min ORB boundary
• Long: VWAP bounce up toward 30m high (purple)
• Short: VWAP rejection down toward 30m low (purple)
STOP: Beyond VWAP by 20 points
TARGET: 30min ORB opposite boundary
WIN RATE: 70-80% | R:R = 1:1.5-2
NOTES: Range-bound play, NOT for breakout traders
```
---
## 🛡️ RISK MANAGEMENT RULES
### **Position Sizing by ORB Range**
```
30min ORB Range | Stop Distance | Risk $500 (1%) | YM Contracts
-----------------|------------------|-----------------|-------------
< 50 points | 50 pts | $500 ÷ $250 = | 2 contracts
50-100 points | 100 pts | $500 ÷ $500 = | 1 contract
100-150 points | 150 pts | $500 ÷ $750 = | 0.66 (use 1)
150-200 points | 200 pts | $500 ÷ $1000 = | 0.5 (use 1)
> 200 points | Don't trade | Too wide | Skip setup
Formula: Risk $ ÷ (Stop Distance × $5 per YM point) = Max Contracts
```
### **The 3-Strike Rule (MANDATORY)**
```
✅ Trade 1: Full position size (based on 30m ORB range)
❌ Stop hit → Trade 2: HALF position size
❌ Stop hit → Trade 3: QUARTER position size
❌ Stop hit → DONE FOR THE DAY (no exceptions)
```
### **Profit Taking Ladder**
```
TARGET 1 (0.5x 30m range): Take 50% off, move stop to breakeven
TARGET 2 (1.0x 30m range): Take 30% off, trail stop by 25 points
TARGET 3 (1.5x 30m range): Take 15% off, let 5% run with 50pt trail
```
---
## ⚠️ DO NOT TRADE IF...
```
🚫 30min ORB incomplete (< 10:00 AM NY / < 3:30 AM London)
🚫 30min ORB range < 40 points YM (too tight, likely chop)
🚫 30min ORB range > 250 points YM (too wide, unpredictable)
🚫 All 3 ORBs wildly divergent (5m=100pts, 15m=180pts, 30m=240pts)
🚫 Major news release within 30 minutes (wait for ORB to reform)
🚫 You've hit 3 losses in the session (3-strike rule)
🚫 You're tired, emotional, revenge trading, or distracted
🚫 Time > 12:00 PM ET (lunch, avoid until 1:00 PM)
🚫 Time > 3:00 PM ET unless Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM) momentum
```
---
## 🔍 PRE-SESSION CHECKLIST
**15 Minutes Before London (2:45 AM ET) or NY (9:15 AM ET):**
```
□ Check economic calendar (FOMC? NFP? CPI? → extra caution)
□ Review previous session's ORB ranges (context for today's volatility)
□ Load SNIPER ORB on 1min or 5min chart
□ Select correct session: "London" or "New York"
□ Verify indicator settings:
• Number of Targets: 3
• Target % of 30min Range: 50%
• Show Anchored VWAP: ON
□ Set TradingView alerts:
• 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM or 3:30 AM)
• Price crossing 30min high/low
• VWAP crosses
□ Prepare bracket orders mentally (entry, stop, 3 targets)
□ Review yesterday's P&L and lessons learned
□ Set phone to "Do Not Disturb" mode
```
---
## 🎨 INDICATOR SETTINGS GUIDE
### **Core Settings (Updated with Toggles)**
```
SESSION SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
• Active Session: "London" or "New York"
ORB DISPLAY (NEW!):
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
☑ Show 5min ORB (toggle blue lines)
☑ Show 15min ORB (toggle cyan lines)
☑ Show 30min ORB (toggle purple lines)
💡 Turn OFF any ORB to declutter your chart!
TARGET SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
• Number of Targets: 3 (default)
• Target % of 30min Range: 50% (default)
VWAP SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
☑ Show Anchored VWAP
• VWAP Color: Gold (#FFC107)
• VWAP Width: 2px
```
### **Color Customization (Optimized for Dark Charts)**
```
DEFAULT COLORS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
5min ORB: Bright Blue (#2196F3) - 3px wide
15min ORB: Cyan (#00BCD4) - 2px wide
30min ORB: Purple (#9C27B0) - 2px wide
Upside Targets: Green (#4CAF50) - 1px dashed
Downside Targets: Red (#F44336) - 1px dashed
VWAP: Gold (#FFC107) - 2px solid
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
WHY THESE COLORS?
• Blue family (5m/15m) = short-term, high-frequency
• Purple (30m) = primary, institutional level
• Green/Red = universal up/down
• Gold VWAP = fair value anchor (stands out)
```
### **Settings by Trading Style**
**BEGINNER (Clean & Simple):**
```
ORB Display:
☐ Show 5min ORB
☐ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (30min only - focus mode)
Number of Targets: 2-3
Target % of 30min Range: 50%
Chart Timeframe: 5-minute
```
**SCALPER (5-15 min holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☑ Show 5min ORB (early signals)
☐ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (confirmation)
Number of Targets: 5
Target % of 30min Range: 30-40%
Label Size: Tiny
Chart Timeframe: 1-minute
```
**DAY TRADER (30-90 min holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☑ Show 5min ORB
☑ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (all 3 - confluence mode)
Number of Targets: 3
Target % of 30min Range: 50%
Label Size: Small
Chart Timeframe: 5-minute (RECOMMENDED)
```
**SWING TRADER (2-4 hour holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☐ Show 5min ORB (too noisy for swings)
☑ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB
Number of Targets: 2-3
Target % of 30min Range: 75-100%
Label Size: Normal
Chart Timeframe: 15-minute
```
---
## 📈 TIMEFRAME SELECTION GUIDE
| Your Timeframe | What You See | Best For |
|---------------|--------------|----------|
| **1-minute** | Every tick, high noise | Scalping, precision entries |
| **5-minute** | Balanced clarity | Day trading (RECOMMENDED) |
| **15-minute** | Clean structure | Swing positions |
| **30-minute** | Too compressed | Not recommended (can't see ORB form) |
**💡 PRO TIP:**
- **Primary chart: 5-minute** (for entries and monitoring)
- **Secondary chart: 1-minute** (for precise timing)
- **Never go above 15-minute** (ORBs won't form properly)
---
## 🧠 READING THE 3-ORB STRUCTURE
### **Bullish Alignment Patterns**
```
PATTERN 1: "Staircase Expansion"
5min: ━━━━ (tight, 60 pts)
15min: ━━━━━━ (wider, 90 pts)
30min: ━━━━━━━━ (widest, 120 pts)
→ Bullish expansion, expect upside breakout
PATTERN 2: "Nested Compression"
5min: ━━ (30 pts)
15min: ━━━ (35 pts)
30min: ━━━━ (40 pts)
→ All tight, explosive breakout likely
PATTERN 3: "Early Commitment"
5min: ━━━━━━ (100 pts, already broken up)
15min: ━━━━━ (80 pts, holding)
30min: ━━━━━ (110 pts, about to break)
→ 5min led the way, 30min confirmation coming
```
### **Bearish Alignment Patterns**
```
PATTERN 1: "Waterfall Setup"
5min: ━━━━ (50 pts, broke down)
15min: ━━━━━ (70 pts, broke down)
30min: ━━━━━━ (90 pts, about to break)
→ Sequential breakdown, strong bearish momentum
PATTERN 2: "Failed Highs"
5min: ━━━━━━ (upper wick rejections)
15min: ━━━━━━ (couldn't break)
30min: ━━━━━━━ (topped out)
→ All 3 rejecting highs, bearish reversal likely
```
### **Neutral/Chop Patterns (AVOID TRADING)**
```
PATTERN 1: "Wide Divergence"
5min: ━━ (30 pts)
15min: ━━━━━━━ (120 pts)
30min: ━━━━━━━━━━━ (200 pts)
→ No consensus, unpredictable, skip
PATTERN 2: "Whipsaw City"
• Price breaking 5min up, then down, then up again
• 15min and 30min not aligned
• VWAP getting crossed every 5 minutes
→ Chop day, step aside, wait for clarity
```
---
## 📊 INTEGRATION WITH YM ULTIMATE SNIPER v8.1
**The 2-System Confluence Method:**
```
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 1: SNIPER ORB → Defines "Zones That Matter" │
│ • 30min ORB = primary institutional range │
│ • VWAP = fair value anchor │
│ • Targets = profit zones │
│ • 5min/15min = early warning signals │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
↓
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 2: YM ULTIMATE SNIPER → Triggers precise entry │
│ • Wait for GOD MODE signal AT 30min ORB boundary │
│ • 6-gate filter: Score ≥9, fat body ≥70%, delta ≥70% │
│ • Candle Dominance Index (CDI) ≥7 │
│ • Intrabar pressure consistent throughout formation │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
↓
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 3: EXECUTE TRADE │
│ • ORB breakout + GOD MODE = MAXIMUM PROBABILITY │
│ • Enter ONLY when BOTH systems align │
│ • This is TRUE "sniper" trading (2-5 trades/day max) │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
```
**Confluence Scoring for Combined System:**
```
SNIPER ORB Criteria:
□ 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM+) +2 points
□ All 3 ORBs broken in same direction +2 points
□ VWAP alignment (below=bull, above=bear) +1 point
□ Volume spike on breakout candle +1 point
□ Tight 3-ORB compression (<100pt divergence) +1 point
YM ULTIMATE SNIPER Criteria:
□ GOD MODE signal at ORB boundary +3 points
□ Score ≥9.0 (tier classification) +1 point
□ Candle Dominance Index (CDI) ≥8 +1 point
TOTAL POSSIBLE: 12 points
TRADE EXECUTION RULES:
• 10-12 points = MAX SIZE (this is the holy grail setup)
• 8-9 points = FULL SIZE (high probability)
• 6-7 points = HALF SIZE (moderate probability)
• <6 points = NO TRADE (wait for better alignment)
```
---
## 💡 COMMON MISTAKES & FIXES
```
❌ MISTAKE: Trading before 30min ORB completes
✅ FIX: Wait until 10:00 AM (NY) or 3:30 AM (London), NO EXCEPTIONS
❌ MISTAKE: Ignoring 5min and 15min ORBs (only watching 30min)
✅ FIX: Use all 3 for confluence - they're your early warning system
❌ MISTAKE: Chasing breakouts 100+ points beyond 30min ORB
✅ FIX: Wait for pullback to VWAP or 30min boundary for re-entry
❌ MISTAKE: Not adjusting target % for market conditions
✅ FIX: Volatile day (ORB >200pts)? Use 75-100% targets
Calm day (ORB <80pts)? Use 30-40% targets
❌ MISTAKE: Trading when all 3 ORBs are wildly different sizes
✅ FIX: Skip the day if 5m/15m/30m diverge by >100pts - no consensus
❌ MISTAKE: Forgetting VWAP position
✅ FIX: VWAP MUST confirm bias:
• Long: price > VWAP
• Short: price < VWAP
• If VWAP contradicts, skip the trade
❌ MISTAKE: Not respecting the 3-strike rule
✅ FIX: 3 losses = DONE for the session, no rationalization
❌ MISTAKE: Trading during lunch (12:00-1:00 PM ET)
✅ FIX: Volume dies, ORBs lose relevance, false signals increase
```
---
## 🔔 ALERT SETUP (ESSENTIAL)
**TradingView Alerts You MUST Set:**
```
ALERT 1: "30min ORB Complete"
• Type: Time-based
• Trigger: 10:00 AM ET (NY) or 3:30 AM ET (London)
• Message: "🎯 30min ORB complete - targets now active"
ALERT 2: "30min ORB High Breakout"
• Type: Crossing Up
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: 30min ORB High (purple line)
• Message: "🚀 30m ORB HIGH broken - check for long setup"
ALERT 3: "30min ORB Low Breakdown"
• Type: Crossing Down
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: 30min ORB Low (purple line)
• Message: "📉 30m ORB LOW broken - check for short setup"
ALERT 4: "VWAP Cross"
• Type: Crossing
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: VWAP
• Message: "⚡ VWAP crossed - check institutional bias shift"
ALERT 5: "Target 1 Hit"
• Type: Crossing
• Value 1: High (for longs) or Low (for shorts)
• Value 2: First target line
• Message: "🎯 Target 1 hit - take 50% off, move stop to BE"
```
---
## 📱 MOBILE TRADING WORKFLOW
**TradingView Mobile App Setup:**
```
1. SAVE LAYOUT
• Chart: 5-minute timeframe
• SNIPER ORB indicator loaded
• YM Ultimate SNIPER v8.1 loaded (if using)
• Save as "SNIPER ORB - YM"
2. ENABLE NOTIFICATIONS
• Settings → Notifications → Push Alerts: ON
• All 5 alerts above configured
3. QUICK ACCESS
• Add YM futures to Watchlist: "MYM" or "YM1!"
• Pin SNIPER ORB layout to favorites
4. EXECUTION READY
• Broker app (TastyTrade, NinjaTrader, etc.) logged in
• Preset bracket orders:
- Entry: market order
- Stop: 30m ORB opposite boundary
- Targets: 3 levels (50%, 30%, 20% of position)
5. BATTERY & CONNECTIVITY
• Phone charged 100% before session
• Stable WiFi or LTE connection
• Backup power bank available
```
---
## 🎓 DAILY PERFORMANCE JOURNAL
**After Each Trading Session (MANDATORY):**
```
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
DATE: __________ SESSION: □ London □ New York
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
ORB DATA:
• 5min ORB Range: ______ points
• 15min ORB Range: ______ points
• 30min ORB Range: ______ points
• Alignment: □ Tight □ Moderate □ Wide (skip if wide)
VWAP BEHAVIOR:
• Opening position: □ Above price □ Below price □ Mixed
• Did VWAP act as support/resistance? □ Yes □ No
TRADES TAKEN:
Total Setups Identified: _____
Trades Executed: _____
Win/Loss Record: _____ W / _____ L
Win Rate: _____%
Gross P&L: $_______
Net P&L (after commissions): $_______
BEST TRADE:
• Setup: ____________________ (which of the 5 setups?)
• Entry Price: ______ Exit Price: ______
• Profit: $_______
• What went RIGHT: _________________________________
_________________________________________________
WORST TRADE:
• Setup: ____________________
• Entry Price: ______ Exit Price: ______
• Loss: $_______
• What went WRONG: _________________________________
_________________________________________________
• Lesson Learned: ___________________________________
3-STRIKE RULE STATUS:
□ No losses (great day)
□ 1 loss (still in game)
□ 2 losses (caution, half size)
□ 3 losses (stopped for day, as required)
TOMORROW'S ADJUSTMENTS:
□ _________________________________________________
□ _________________________________________________
□ _________________________________________________
EMOTIONAL STATE TODAY:
□ Calm & focused (optimal)
□ Anxious/rushed (need to work on patience)
□ Overconfident (dial back position size)
□ Fearful (review winning trades to build confidence)
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
```
---
## 🚀 YOUR FIRST LIVE TRADE WALKTHROUGH
**Step-by-Step for New York Session (Most Common):**
```
⏰ 9:15 AM ET - PREPARATION
□ Load SNIPER ORB on YM 5-minute chart
□ Select "New York" session in indicator settings
□ Verify VWAP is showing (gold line)
□ Check economic calendar (any big news at 9:30?)
□ Prepare mentally: "I will wait for 30min ORB to complete"
⏰ 9:30 AM ET - SESSION OPENS
□ Watch 3 ORBs begin forming:
• Blue lines (5min) will lock in at 9:35 AM
• Cyan lines (15min) will lock in at 9:45 AM
• Purple lines (30min) will lock in at 10:00 AM
□ Observe VWAP anchoring at 9:30 AM candle
□ DO NOT TRADE YET - just observe
⏰ 9:35 AM - 5MIN ORB COMPLETE
□ Note 5min high/low (blue lines locked)
□ Check info table: "5m Range = XX points"
□ If 5min ORB breaks early, note direction but DON'T ENTER
⏰ 9:45 AM - 15MIN ORB COMPLETE
□ Note 15min high/low (cyan lines locked)
□ Compare to 5min ORB: Aligned? Expanding?
□ Still waiting... patience pays
⏰ 10:00 AM - 30MIN ORB COMPLETE (TARGETS APPEAR!)
□ Purple lines locked (30m high/low)
□ Green/red dashed target lines appear automatically
□ Info table shows "Status: ✓ Complete"
□ NOW you can trade breakouts
⏰ 10:00 AM - 11:30 AM - TRADING WINDOW
□ Wait for price to break purple line (30m ORB high or low)
□ Confirm:
1. All 3 ORBs broken in same direction?
2. VWAP confirming (below=bullish, above=bearish)?
3. Volume spike visible?
4. YM SNIPER GOD MODE signal? (if using)
□ If all YES → ENTER TRADE:
• Market order at breakout close
• Stop at 30m ORB opposite boundary
• Targets at green/red dashed lines
⏰ TARGET MANAGEMENT
□ Price hits first target (1x) → Take 50% off, move stop to BE
□ Price hits second target (2x) → Take 30% off, trail stop
□ Price hits third target (3x) → Take 15% off, let 5% run
⏰ 12:00 PM - LUNCH (AVOID TRADING)
□ Volume dies down
□ ORBs become less relevant
□ Take a break, review morning trades
⏰ 1:00 PM - 3:00 PM - AFTERNOON SESSION
□ ORBs still valid but less reliable
□ Consider waiting for Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM)
⏰ 5:00 PM - SESSION END
□ All ORB lines disappear automatically
□ VWAP disappears automatically
□ Chart cleans itself - ready for tomorrow
□ Fill out daily journal
```
---
## 🏆 WINNING MINDSET AFFIRMATIONS
Read these BEFORE each trading session:
```
"I trade ORBs, not chaos. Structure gives me edge."
"3 high-quality trades beat 20 mediocre ones."
"The 30min ORB is my anchor. I wait for it. Every. Single. Time."
"When all 3 ORBs align, institutions are unified. I follow."
"VWAP is my institutional compass. I respect its guidance."
"3 strikes and I'm out. Discipline > Ego."
"I am a SNIPER, not a machine gunner. Precision wins."
"My edge is patience. Let the ORBs complete."
"I don't predict. I react to proven structure."
"One perfect setup is worth waiting all morning."
```
---
## 📞 TROUBLESHOOTING
**"ORB lines not showing on chart!"**
→ Check timeframe: Must be 1min-30min (not daily/weekly)
→ Verify session time: Must be during London (3AM-9:30AM) or NY (9:30AM-5PM)
→ Check indicator status: Should say "⏳ Forming" or "✓ Complete" in table
**"Targets not appearing!"**
→ 30min ORB must be complete (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
→ Check "Number of Targets" setting (must be ≥1)
→ Verify "Target % of 30min Range" is set (default 50%)
**"VWAP disappeared!"**
→ Normal behavior: VWAP auto-deletes at session end (5PM NY / 9:30AM London)
→ Toggle "Show Anchored VWAP" OFF then ON to reset
→ Check if you're viewing chart outside session hours
**"All 3 ORBs look the same!"**
→ This is actually GOOD - means tight alignment (high-probability setup)
→ If they're diverging wildly (>100pts difference), that's a skip signal
**"Info table blocking my view!"**
→ Info table is in top-right corner by default
→ Drag it to a different position (TradingView allows moving)
→ Or minimize it by clicking the small arrow
**"Colors are hard to see on my chart!"**
→ Go to indicator settings:
• "5min ORB", "15min ORB", "30min ORB" color pickers
• "Upside Targets", "Downside Targets" color pickers
• Recommended: Use contrasting colors vs your chart background
---
## 📚 ADVANCED INTEGRATION TECHNIQUES
### **Combining with Market Profile**
```
• Use Volume Profile to identify Value Area High (VAH) and Low (VAL)
• If 30min ORB aligns with VAH/VAL → extra confluence
• POC (Point of Control) acts similar to VWAP
```
### **Combining with Cumulative Delta**
```
• Check if delta is positive on 30min ORB high break (bullish confirmation)
• Negative delta on low break confirms bearish institutional flow
• Your YM SNIPER already tracks this - use together!
```
### **Combining with Options Flow**
```
• Large call buying near 30min ORB high? Institutions positioning for breakout
• Large put buying near 30min ORB low? Smart money hedging/shorting
• Tools: Unusual Whales, Cheddar Flow, OptionStrat
```
---
## 🎯 FINAL PRE-LIVE CHECKLIST
**DO NOT GO LIVE UNTIL ALL CHECKED:**
```
□ Practiced on TradingView Replay for 2+ weeks
□ Can identify all 5 setups by pattern recognition
□ Understand why targets come from 30min ORB only
□ Know difference between 5min/15min/30min roles
□ Risk management rules memorized (position sizing, 3-strike)
□ YM Ultimate SNIPER v8.1 loaded (optional but recommended)
□ All 5 TradingView alerts configured
□ Broker platform tested with demo account
□ Stop/target orders can be placed in <10 seconds
□ Daily journal template prepared
□ Emotional state: calm, patient, focused
□ Account size: Minimum $10,000 recommended
□ Understand auto-disappear behavior (ORBs delete at session end)
□ Know NOT to trade before 30min ORB complete
□ Comfortable with looking at chart and seeing 6+ lines (3 ORBs + targets)
IF ALL CHECKED → YOU'RE READY TO SNIPE! 🎯
IF ANY UNCHECKED → KEEP PRACTICING, DON'T RUSH
```
---
## 💎 THE CORE PRINCIPLE
```
╔═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╗
║ ║
║ "The ORB doesn't predict the market. ║
║ The ORB reveals where institutions are positioned. ║
║ ║
║ When you see all 3 ORBs align and break, ║
║ you're not guessing direction— ║
║ you're following the billion-dollar order flow." ║
║ ║
║ THAT'S YOUR EDGE. ║
║ ║
╚═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╝
```
**🎯 Good luck, stay patient, and happy sniping! 🎯**
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
END OF SNIPER ORB TRADING CHEAT SHEET v3.0
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
In-Range Rolling SL
In-Range Rolling SL Indicator Guide
The In-Range Rolling SL indicator is a dynamic stop-loss system designed for intraday trading that identifies squeeze conditions and trade entry opportunities based on rolling price windows.
Core Concept
The indicator analyzes the highest high and lowest low over a defined lookback period (default: 2 candles) to establish an "in-range" zone. When price stays within this range without breaking either boundary, it creates a squeeze condition—signaling potential breakout opportunities.
Trading Strategy
Wait for the Squeeze Setup
The most effective approach is to wait for the in-range stop-loss squeeze to form. This occurs when both the long SL (green line) and short SL (red line) are active simultaneously, indicated by the yellow status dot (🟡) in the indicator table. Analyze the wick high/close relationship against the in-range SL while price remains compressed—this setup identifies which side is more likely to break first.
Entry Timing and Risk Management
Long Entry: Enter when a candle closes above the in-range short SL (red line) without any wick above it. This "perfect breakout candle" confirms bullish momentum. Your entry should be around the region, with your stop-loss placed just below the top of the breakout candle's high.
Short Entry: Enter when a candle closes below the in-range long SL (green line). The stop-loss for short trades should be set 34.26 points above your entry for appropriate risk protection.
Risk-Reward Considerations
If you enter at the low of a breakout candle, expect only 8.26 points of drawdown potential. However, if you accidentally go long and your stop gets hit, you'll experience the full in-range stop-loss distance as your loss.
Advanced Techniques
Failed Breakout Trap: If a follow-up candle doesn't make a higher high after the initial breakout, consider adding a "winner" for compensation rather than holding for a trap. When your buy-stop sits on top of the breakout candle high, this isn't a valid long trade setup.
Flip Trade Opportunity: In-range stop-loss attempts to flip often provide ideal entry points. If the up candle doesn't break the previous low, this validates the long continuation.
Long Scalp Trading: A failed long scalp can be traded if you missed the initial market open down-up-down trend. With a stop-loss of 34 points and potential profit exceeding 50 points, this provides favorable risk-reward ratios.
Sustained Loss Management: Stop-loss for long positions should target 26 points maximum loss. The indicator automatically invalidates stop-losses when price violates them, keeping your chart clean for the next setup.
-------------------------
In-Range Rolling SL Indicator Guide
The In-Range Rolling SL indicator is a dynamic stop-loss system designed for intraday trading that identifies squeeze conditions and breakout opportunities based on rolling price windows.
How the Indicator Works
The indicator tracks the highest high and lowest low over your selected lookback period (default: 2 candles) to establish dynamic support and resistance levels. These levels create an "in-range" zone that adapts as new price action develops.
Visual Components
Green Line (Long SL): The rolling window's lowest low - your stop-loss level for long positions
Red Line (Short SL): The rolling window's highest high - your stop-loss level for short positions
Status Indicators:
🟡 Yellow: Squeeze condition (both SLs active)
🟢 Green: Long-only setup
🔴 Red: Short-only setup
⚪ White: Neutral (no active SLs)
The Squeeze Setup Strategy
Step 1: Wait for the Squeeze
The most effective way to use the In-Range Rolling SL is to wait for the in-range stop-loss squeeze to form. During the squeeze, both the green and red lines are active, meaning price has stayed within the rolling window without breaking either boundary. This compression phase indicates that it's "go time" to prepare your trade.
While in the squeeze, analyze the wick high/close relationship against the in-range SL levels. This analysis helps you determine which side is more likely to split when the breakout occurs.
Step 2: Identify the Perfect Breakout
Long Breakout: A perfect breakout candle should close above the in-range stop-loss high (red line) without any wick above it. This clean breakout demonstrates strong momentum and reduces the risk of a false breakout.
Short Breakout: Look for a candle that closes below the in-range SL low (green line), indicating a short-side trade is coming up.
Step 3: Entry Execution
Long Entry: Your entry should be around the region of the breakout. Position your stop-loss just below the top of the breakout candle's high. This placement protects you from failed breakouts while giving the trade room to develop.
Short Entry: Enter as the candle closes below the in-range SL low. The stop-loss for short-side trades is typically 34.26 points of potential loss based on the indicator's measurements.
Risk-Reward Analysis
Entry at Breakout Low
If you enter here at the low of the breakout candle, you're looking at only 8.26 points of drawdown potential. This represents your best-case entry scenario.
Accidental Wrong-Side Entry
However, if you accidentally go long here and your stop gets hit, you'll experience the full in-range stop-loss distance as your loss. This emphasizes the importance of waiting for clear breakout confirmation.
Long Scalp Opportunity
A failed long scalp can be traded here if you missed the market open down-up-down trend. With a stop-loss of 34 points and potential profit greater than 50 points, this setup offers a favorable risk-reward ratio of approximately 1:1.5.
Advanced Trade Management
Failed Breakout Recognition
Follow-Up Candle Validation: If a follow-up candle did not make a higher high than the breakout candle, this could be a trap. Your buy-stop on top of the breakout candle high is not a valid long trade setup in this scenario. Consider adding a "winner" for compensation rather than holding through the potential reversal.
Flip Trade Opportunities
In-range stop-loss tries to flip to the other side often provide excellent entries. If the up candle did not break the previous low, this validates the long continuation and suggests the squeeze is resolving to the upside.
Sustained Position Management
Stop-Loss Guidelines: Stop-loss for long positions should be 26 points of maximum loss. The indicator table displays the delta (Δ) showing your real-time distance to the active stop-loss, helping you manage risk dynamically.
Entry Timing: Your entry should be around the region where the breakout confirms, rather than chasing price after a large move. In order to prepare your trade, position your stop-loss on top of the breakout candle's high for long trades.
Practical Example from the Chart
Looking at the MNQ1! chart, you can see multiple squeeze formations throughout the session. The most notable sequence shows:
An initial downtrend creating a squeeze setup
A perfect breakout candle closing above the red line without upper wick
The subsequent candle validating the move
Later, a failed breakout attempt that created a short opportunity
Multiple flip attempts that provided re-entry points for scalpers
The indicator's table in the top-right continuously updates with the current SL levels, gap size, candle size, and delta values - giving you all the information needed to assess each trade's risk-reward profile in real-time.
YM Ultimate SNIPER# YM Ultimate SNIPER - Documentation & Trading Guide
## 🎯 Unified GRA + DeepFlow | YM-Optimized for Low Volatility
**TARGET: 3-7 High-Confluence Trades per Day**
> **Philosophy:** *YM's lower volatility is not a weakness—it's our edge. Predictability + precision = consistent profits.*
---
## ⚡ QUICK REFERENCE CARD
```
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ YM ULTIMATE SNIPER - QUICK REFERENCE │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 💰 YM BASICS: │
│ ═════════════ │
│ • 1 tick = 1 point = $5/contract │
│ • Typical daily range: 150-400 points │
│ • 30-40% less volatile than NQ │
│ • More institutional, less retail noise │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🎯 TIER THRESHOLDS (YM-OPTIMIZED): │
│ ══════════════════════════════════ │
│ S-TIER: 50+ pts = $250+/contract → HOLD (Institutional sweep) │
│ A-TIER: 25-49 pts = $125-245/contract → SWING (Strong momentum) │
│ B-TIER: 12-24 pts = $60-120/contract → SCALP (Quick grab) │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ⏰ SESSION WINDOWS: │
│ ═══════════════════ │
│ LDN → 3:00-5:00 AM ET (European flow) │
│ NY → 9:30-11:30 AM ET (US opening drive) │
│ PWR → 3:00-4:00 PM ET (End-of-day rebalancing) │
│ │
│ Expected Trades: 1-2 LDN | 2-3 NY | 1-2 PWR = 4-7 total │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 📊 CONFLUENCE SCORING (MAX 10 POINTS): │
│ ═══════════════════════════════════════ │
│ Tier Signal: S=3, A=2, B=1 points │
│ In Active Zone: +2 points │
│ POC Aligned: +1 point (POC at body extreme) │
│ Imbalance Support:+1 point (supporting IMB nearby) │
│ Strong Volume: +1 point (2x+ average) │
│ Strong Delta: +1 point (70%+ dominance) │
│ CVD Momentum: +1 point (CVD trending with signal) │
│ │
│ MINIMUM SCORE: 5/10 to show signal (adjustable) │
│ IDEAL SCORE: 7+/10 for highest probability │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🚨 SIGNAL TYPES: │
│ ═════════════════ │
│ S🎯 / A🎯 / B🎯 → GRA Tier Signals (Full confluence) │
│ Z🎯 → Zone Entry (At DFZ zone + delta + volume) │
│ SP → Single Print (Institutional impulse) │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ✓ ENTRY CHECKLIST: │
│ ═══════════════════ │
│ □ Signal appears (check Score ≥5) │
│ □ Session active (LDN!/NY!/PWR!) │
│ □ Table: Vol GREEN, Delta colored, Body GREEN │
│ □ CVD arrow (▲/▼) matches direction │
│ □ Note stop/target lines on chart │
│ □ Check Zone status (bonus if IN ZONE) │
│ □ Execute at signal candle close │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🎯 POSITION SIZING BY TIER: │
│ ═══════════════════════════ │
│ S-TIER (50+ pts): Full size, hold 2-5 min, target 2.5:1 R:R │
│ A-TIER (25-49): 75% size, hold 1-3 min, target 2.0:1 R:R │
│ B-TIER (12-24): 50% size, hold 30-90 sec, target 1.5:1 R:R │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ⛔ DO NOT TRADE WHEN: │
│ ════════════════════ │
│ ✗ Session shows "---" │
│ ✗ Score < 5/10 │
│ ✗ Vol shows RED (<1.8x) │
│ ✗ Delta < 62% │
│ ✗ Multiple conflicting signals │
│ ✗ Just before major news (FOMC, NFP, etc.) │
│ │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
```
---
## 📋 WHY YM? LEVERAGING LOW VOLATILITY
### The YM Advantage
Most traders avoid YM because "it doesn't move enough." This is precisely why it's perfect for precision scalping:
| Factor | NQ | YM | Advantage |
|--------|----|----|-----------|
| **Daily Range** | 300-600 pts | 150-400 pts | More predictable moves |
| **Tick Value** | $5/tick (4 ticks/pt) | $5/tick (1 tick/pt) | Simpler math |
| **Retail Noise** | High | Low | Cleaner signals |
| **Whipsaws** | Frequent | Rare | Fewer fakeouts |
| **Trend Persistence** | Short | Long | Easier holds |
| **Fill Quality** | Variable | Consistent | Better execution |
### Why 3-7 Trades is the Sweet Spot
```
YM SESSION BREAKDOWN:
════════════════════
LONDON (3-5 AM ET): 1-2 trades
├── Why: European institutions positioning for US open
├── Character: Slow build-up, clean trends
└── Best signals: Zone entries + A/B tier
NY OPEN (9:30-11:30 AM ET): 2-3 trades
├── Why: Highest volume, most institutional activity
├── Character: Initial balance formation, breakouts
└── Best signals: S/A tier, zone confluence
POWER HOUR (3-4 PM ET): 1-2 trades
├── Why: End-of-day rebalancing, MOC orders
├── Character: Mean reversion or trend acceleration
└── Best signals: Zone entries, B tier quick scalps
TOTAL: 4-7 high-quality setups per day
```
---
## 🔧 YM-SPECIFIC OPTIMIZATIONS
This unified indicator has been specifically tuned for YM's characteristics:
### Tier Thresholds
| Tier | NQ (Original) | YM (Optimized) | Rationale |
|------|---------------|----------------|-----------|
| S-Tier | 100 pts | **50 pts** | YM's daily range is ~50% of NQ |
| A-Tier | 50 pts | **25 pts** | Proportional scaling |
| B-Tier | 20 pts | **12 pts** | Still 5%+ of typical daily range |
### Filter Adjustments
| Filter | NQ Value | YM Value | Why |
|--------|----------|----------|-----|
| Volume Ratio | 1.5x | **1.8x** | Higher bar = less retail noise |
| Delta Threshold | 60% | **62%** | Tighter for cleaner signals |
| Body Ratio | 70% | **72%** | More conviction required |
| Range Multiplier | 1.3x | **1.4x** | Bigger move = real signal |
| Gap ATR% | 30% | **25%** | Smaller gaps still significant |
| Zone Age | 50 bars | **75 bars** | Zones last longer in slow market |
### Why These Changes Work
1. **Higher Volume Bar**: YM has more institutional flow. Requiring 1.8x volume ensures we're catching real moves, not retail chop.
2. **Tighter Delta**: With less noise, we can demand clearer buyer/seller dominance before entering.
3. **Longer Zone Life**: YM trends persist longer. A zone that would be stale in NQ is still viable in YM.
4. **Smaller Gap Threshold**: YM gaps are naturally smaller. 25% of ATR in YM is significant institutional activity.
---
## 📊 CONFLUENCE SCORING SYSTEM
The unified indicator uses a 10-point confluence scoring system to filter for only the highest-probability setups:
### Score Breakdown
```
CONFLUENCE SCORE CALCULATION:
═════════════════════════════
BASE POINTS (Tier):
├── S-Tier signal: +3 points
├── A-Tier signal: +2 points
└── B-Tier signal: +1 point
BONUS POINTS:
├── Inside Active Zone (DFZ): +2 points
│ └── Price within bull/bear zone = institutional level
│
├── POC Alignment: +1 point
│ └── POC at body extreme = strong conviction
│
├── Imbalance Support: +1 point
│ └── Supporting imbalance within 1 ATR
│
├── Strong Volume (2x+): +1 point
│ └── Exceptional institutional participation
│
├── Strong Delta (70%+): +1 point
│ └── Clear one-sided aggression
│
└── CVD Momentum: +1 point
└── CVD trending with signal direction
MAXIMUM POSSIBLE: 10 points
```
### Score Interpretation
| Score | Quality | Action | Expected Win Rate |
|-------|---------|--------|-------------------|
| 8-10 | 🥇 Elite | Full size, hold for target | 75-80% |
| 6-7 | 🥈 Strong | Standard size, manage actively | 65-70% |
| 5 | 🥉 Valid | Reduced size, quick scalp | 55-60% |
| <5 | ⚫ Filtered | No signal shown | N/A |
### Adjusting Minimum Score
- **Conservative (Score ≥6)**: Fewer trades, higher win rate
- **Standard (Score ≥5)**: Balanced approach, 3-7 trades/day
- **Aggressive (Score ≥4)**: More trades, requires active management
---
## 📐 SIGNAL TYPES EXPLAINED
### 1. GRA Tier Signals (S🎯, A🎯, B🎯)
These are the primary signals from the merged GRA system:
```
TIER SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Point movement meets tier threshold
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.8x average
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% (buy or sell dominance)
├── ✓ Body ≥ 72% of candle range
├── ✓ Range ≥ 1.4x average
├── ✓ Small opposite wick (<50% of body)
├── ✓ CVD confirms direction (if enabled)
├── ✓ Active session (LDN/NY/PWR)
└── ✓ Confluence Score ≥ minimum (default 5)
```
### 2. Zone Entry Signals (Z🎯)
When price enters a DeepFlow zone with confirmation:
```
ZONE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Price inside fresh/tested zone (not broken)
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% in zone direction
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.5x average
└── ✓ Active session
NOTE: Z🎯 only appears when NOT already showing tier signal
(prevents duplicate signals on same candle)
```
### 3. Single Print Markers (SP)
Mark institutional impulse candles for future S/R:
```
SINGLE PRINT REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Range ≥ 1.6x average
├── ✓ Body ≥ 72% of range
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.8x average
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% confirms direction
└── ✓ Active session
USE: Horizontal lines at high/low act as future S/R
```
---
## 🎯 TRADING STRATEGIES
### Strategy 1: Zone + Tier Confluence (Highest Probability)
```
THE ULTIMATE YM SETUP:
═══════════════════════
Setup:
1. Active DeepFlow zone exists (green box below for long)
2. Price pulls back INTO the zone
3. Tier signal fires INSIDE the zone (S🎯/A🎯)
4. Score shows 7+/10
Entry: Signal candle close
Stop: Below zone bottom (for longs)
Target: Based on tier (1.5-2.5:1 R:R)
Why It Works:
• Zone = institutional limit orders
• Tier signal = momentum confirmation
• Double confirmation = high probability
Expected Win Rate: 70-75%
```
### Strategy 2: Pure Tier Signal with POC Stop
```
SNIPER TIER TRADE:
══════════════════
Setup:
1. Tier signal appears (preferably A or S)
2. Score ≥ 5/10
3. Note POC level on signal candle
4. Red/green stop/target lines appear
Entry: Signal candle close
Stop: Beyond POC (shown on chart)
Target: Auto-calculated based on tier
Key: POC placement matters
• POC near candle bottom (longs) = STRONG
• POC in middle = weaker signal
• POC at extreme = possible exhaustion
Expected Win Rate: 60-65%
```
### Strategy 3: Zone Bounce (Continuation)
```
ZONE BOUNCE TRADE:
══════════════════
Setup:
1. Fresh zone created during session
2. Price leaves zone, moves in zone direction
3. Price returns to test zone (within 15 bars)
4. Z🎯 signal appears or rejection candle forms
Entry: At CE line (middle of zone)
Stop: Beyond zone edge
Target: Previous swing high/low
Why It Works:
• Zones represent unfilled orders
• First retest often finds support/resistance
• Lower volatility = cleaner bounces
Expected Win Rate: 55-60%
```
### Strategy 4: Single Print Scalp
```
SINGLE PRINT SCALP:
═══════════════════
Setup:
1. Single Print (SP) marker appears
2. Note the gold/purple lines at high/low
3. Wait for price to return to SP level
4. Look for rejection or tier signal at level
Entry: At SP line with confirmation
Stop: Beyond the SP line
Target: Quick 1:1 or to next structure
Why It Works:
• SP = price moved too fast, orders unfilled
• Price often returns to "fill" these levels
• YM's slower pace makes retests likely
Expected Win Rate: 55-60%
```
---
## 📊 TABLE LEGEND
| Field | Reading | Color Meaning |
|-------|---------|---------------|
| **Pts** | Current candle points | Gold/Green/Yellow = Tiered |
| **Tier** | S/A/B/X | Tier color or white |
| **Vol** | Volume ratio | 🟢 ≥1.8x, 🔴 <1.8x |
| **Delta** | Buy/Sell % | 🟢 Buy dom, 🔴 Sell dom |
| **Body** | Body % of range | 🟢 ≥72%, 🔴 <72% |
| **CVD** | Trend direction | ▲ Bullish, ▼ Bearish |
| **Sess** | Active session | 🟡 LDN!/NY!/PWR!, ⚫ --- |
| **POC** | Point of Control | 🟡 Gold price level |
| **Zone** | Zone position | 🟢 BUY⬚, 🔴 SELL⬚, ⚫ --- |
| **Zones** | Active zone count | #B/#S format |
| **Score** | Confluence score | 🟢 7+, 🟡 5-6, ⚫ <5 |
| **IMB** | Recent imbalances | Count in last 10 bars |
| **R:R** | Risk/Reward | 🟢 On signal, ⚫ No signal |
---
## ⏰ SESSION-SPECIFIC PLAYBOOKS
### London Session (3:00-5:00 AM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Slow, methodical, trend-building
VOLUME: Medium (50-70% of NY)
BEST SETUPS: Zone entries, A/B tier with zones
PLAYBOOK:
• Enter on zone retests
• Expect 15-25 pt moves
• Don't fight early direction
• Watch for pre-NY positioning
TYPICAL TRADES: 1-2
```
### NY Open (9:30-11:30 AM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Fast, volatile, high-conviction
VOLUME: Highest of day
BEST SETUPS: S/A tier, zone confluence
PLAYBOOK:
• First 15 min: Observe Initial Balance
• 9:45-10:15: Best setups form
• S-tier signals = ride the wave
• Be aggressive on high scores
TYPICAL TRADES: 2-3
```
### Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Rebalancing, MOC orders
VOLUME: Medium-high (70-80% of NY)
BEST SETUPS: B tier scalps, zone entries
PLAYBOOK:
• Watch for mean reversion setups
• Quick scalps around POC levels
• Don't hold through close
• Take profits at 1:1 R:R
TYPICAL TRADES: 1-2
```
---
## 🔧 RECOMMENDED SETTINGS
### Conservative (Fewer, Better Trades)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 6 | Only strong setups |
| Min Volume Ratio | 2.0 | Higher bar |
| Delta Threshold | 65% | Stricter dominance |
| Max Zones | 8 | Less clutter |
### Standard (Balanced)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 5 | Default |
| Min Volume Ratio | 1.8 | Default |
| Delta Threshold | 62% | Default |
| Max Zones | 12 | Default |
### Aggressive (More Opportunities)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 4 | More signals |
| Min Volume Ratio | 1.5 | Lower bar |
| Delta Threshold | 60% | Looser |
| Max Zones | 15 | More context |
---
## 🚨 ALERT SETUP
Configure these alerts in TradingView:
| Alert | Priority | Action |
|-------|----------|--------|
| 🎯 YM S-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🔴 CRITICAL | Drop everything, check immediately |
| 🎯 YM A-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🟠 HIGH | Evaluate within 15 seconds |
| 🎯 YM B-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🟡 MEDIUM | Check if available |
| 🎯 YM ZONE BUY/SELL | 🟢 STANDARD | Good context entry |
| 📦 NEW ZONE | 🔵 INFO | Mark on mental map |
| ⭐ SINGLE PRINT | 🔵 INFO | Note for future S/R |
| SESSION OPEN | ⚪ INFO | Prepare to trade |
### Alert Message Format
```
🎯 YM A-LONG | YM1! @ 42,150 | 68%B | Score: 7/10 | IN ZONE | POC: 42,125 | Stop: 42,098 | SWING
```
---
## ⚠️ COMMON MISTAKES TO AVOID
| Mistake | Why It's Bad | Solution |
|---------|-------------|----------|
| Trading outside sessions | Low volume = noise | Wait for LDN/NY/PWR |
| Ignoring score | Low scores = low probability | Require ≥5/10 |
| Fighting the zone | Zones are institutional | Trade WITH zones |
| Oversizing B-tier | Quick scalps, not holds | 50% size max |
| Holding through news | Volatility spike | Exit before FOMC, NFP |
| Chasing after signal | Entry on close only | Miss it = wait for next |
| Ignoring POC position | Middle POC = indecision | Strong = extreme POC |
---
## 📈 DAILY TRADE JOURNAL TEMPLATE
```
DATE: ___________
SESSION: □ LDN □ NY □ PWR
TRADE 1:
├── Time: _______
├── Signal: S🎯 / A🎯 / B🎯 / Z🎯
├── Score: ___/10
├── Entry: _______
├── Stop: _______
├── Target: _______
├── In Zone: □ Yes □ No
├── Result: +/- ___ pts ($_____)
└── Notes: _______________________
TRADE 2:
DAILY SUMMARY:
├── Total Trades: ___
├── Win Rate: ___%
├── Net P/L: $_____
├── Best Setup: _______
└── Improvement: _______________________
```
---
## 🏆 GOLDEN RULES FOR YM
> **"YM rewards patience. Wait for the confluence—it's worth it."**
> **"Low volatility means you can size up. One good trade beats five forced trades."**
> **"Score 7+ is your edge. Anything less is gambling."**
> **"The zone + tier combo is your bread and butter. Master it."**
> **"Leave every trade with money. YM gives you time to manage."**
---
## 📊 VISUAL GUIDE
```
PERFECT YM SNIPER SETUP:
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
│ Current Price
│
┌─────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────┐
│ BEARISH ZONE (Red) │
│- - - - - - - CE Line (Entry for shorts) - - - - - - │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
══════════════════╪══════════════════ SP High (Purple)
│
┌─────────────────────┤
│█████████████████████│ ← A🎯 LONG Signal
│█████████████████████│ Score: 8/10
│ ●──────────────────│ ← POC (Gold) near bottom = STRONG
│█████████████████████│
│█████████████████████│
└─────────────────────┤
│
══════════════════╪══════════════════ SP Low (Purple)
│
┌─────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────┐
│ BULLISH ZONE (Green) │
│- - - - - - - CE Line (Entry for longs) - - - - - - -│
│██████████████████████████████████████████████████████│
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
Stop Loss
CONFLUENCE CHECK:
✓ A-Tier signal (+2)
✓ At edge of bullish zone (+2)
✓ POC at bottom of candle (+1)
✓ Strong volume 2.3x (+1)
✓ Delta 72% buyers (+1)
✓ CVD bullish (+1)
TOTAL: 8/10 = ELITE SETUP
ACTION: Full size LONG at signal candle close
STOP: Below zone bottom
TARGET: 2:1 R:R (auto-calculated)
```
---
## 🔧 TROUBLESHOOTING
| Issue | Cause | Fix |
|-------|-------|-----|
| No signals appearing | Score too high | Lower min score to 4-5 |
| Too many signals | Score too low | Raise min score to 6+ |
| Zones cluttering chart | Max zones high | Reduce to 8-10 |
| POC not showing | Tiered filter on | Check "POC Only Tiered" |
| Session not highlighting | Wrong timezone | Verify timezone setting |
| Alerts not firing | Not configured | Set up in TradingView alerts |
---
## 📝 PINE SCRIPT V6 TECHNICAL NOTES
This indicator uses advanced features:
- **User Defined Types (UDT)**: Clean state management for zones/imbalances
- **`request.security_lower_tf()`**: Intrabar volume analysis
- **Dynamic Array Management**: Efficient memory for drawings
- **Confluence Scoring Engine**: Multi-factor signal qualification
- **Auto Stop/Target**: Dynamic risk management calculation
**Minimum TradingView Plan:** Pro (for intrabar data access)
---
*© Alexandro Disla - YM Ultimate SNIPER*
*Pine Script v6 | TradingView*
*Unified GRA v5 + DeepFlow Zones | YM-Optimized*
Inversion Fair Value Gap Model [PJ Trades]GENERAL OVERVIEW:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator is a complete rule-based system designed to identify trade setups using the Inversion Fair Value Gap strategy taught by PJ Trades. It automates the strategy’s workflow by detecting liquidity sweeps, confirming V-shape recoveries, identifying valid Inversion Fair Value Gaps, validating higher-timeframe Fair Value Gap taps, and checking for a clear opposite Draw On Liquidity. These factors are evaluated together to produce a signal rating of A, A+, or A++, based on how many of these criteria the setup satisfies. When a long or short setup is confirmed, the indicator automatically plots an entry, stop-loss, break-even, and two take-profit levels.
A dashboard that updates in real-time displays the current directional bias, liquidity sweep activity, Inversion Fair Value Gap confirmation state, V Shape Recovery state, higher-timeframe Fair Value Gap context, opposite Draw on Liquidity, SMT divergence, and other key information relevant to the trading model. The indicator also includes optional trade statistics on the dashboard that tracks the recent win rates for A, A+, and A++ setups, as well as separate long and short win rates.
This indicator was developed by Flux Charts, in collaboration with PJ Trades.
What is the theory behind the indicator?:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap model is built on the idea that when the market pushes above a high or below a low, it often does so to sweep liquidity. If that move quickly fails and price reverses, it shows the sweep was a grab for orders and not a continuation. That quick rejection is the V Shape Recovery behavior. An Inversion Fair Value Gap forms when a Fair Value Gap that once supported the original move gets invalidated afterward. That invalidation confirms the shift in direction and becomes the new reference point for trades. The Inversion Fair Value Gap model uses this sequence because it highlights when the market has taken liquidity, rejected continuation, and started delivering in the opposite direction.
INVERSION FAIR VALUE GAP MODEL FEATURES:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes 15 main features:
Sessions
Key Levels & Swing Levels
Liquidity Levels
Liquidity Sweeps
V Shape Recoveries
Higher-Timeframe Fair Value Gaps
Inversion Fair Value Gaps
Macros
Bias
Signals
New Day Opening Gap
New Week Opening Gap
SMT Divergences
Dashboard
Alerts
SESSIONS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes five trading sessions (times in EST):
Asia: 20:00 - 00:00
London: 02:00 - 05:00
NY AM: 09:30 - 12:15
NY Lunch: 12:15 - 13:30
NY PM: 13:30 - 16:00
Session highs and lows are automatically tracked and used within the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Session Zones:
Each session has a zone that outlines its active time window. These zones can be toggled on or off independently. When active, they visually separate each part of the trading day. Users can adjust the color and opacity of each session box. Users can also enable session labels, which place a label above each session zone showing its corresponding session name.
🔹Session Time:
Users can toggle on ‘Time’ which will display each session’s time window next to its session title.
🔹Session Highs/Lows:
Every session can display its own high and low as horizontal lines. Users can customize the line style for session highs/lows, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted. The color of the lines will match the same color used for the session box. Users can adjust the color of the labels as well, which is applied to all session high/low labels.
When price has moved above a session high, or below a session low, the label will not be displayed anymore.
🔹Extend Levels:
When enabled, each session’s high and low levels can be extended forward by a set number of bars.
Please Note: Disabling a session under the main Sessions section only hides its visuals (boxes, lines, or labels). It does not impact signal detection or logic.
KEY LEVELS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes 11 key market levels that outline important structural price areas across daily, weekly, and monthly timeframes. These levels include the Daily Open, Previous Day High/Low, Weekly Open, Previous Week High/Low, Monthly Open, Previous Month High/Low, Midnight Open, and 08:30 Open. The levels can be enabled or disabled and customized in color and line style. All of the levels except the Midnight Open and 08:30 Open are used for the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Daily Open
The Daily Open marks where the current trading day began.
🔹Previous Day High/Low
The Previous Day High (PDH) marks the highest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where buyers pushed price to its highest point before the market closed.
The Previous Day Low (PDL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where selling pressure reached its lowest point before buyers stepped in.
When price pushes above the PDH or below the PDL, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Weekly Open
The Weekly Open marks the first price of the current trading week.
🔹Previous Week High/Low
The Previous Week High (PWH) marks the highest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where buying pressure reached its peak before the weekly close.
The Previous Week Low (PWL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where sellers pushed price to its lowest point before buyers regained control.
When price pushes above the PWH or below the PWL, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Monthly Open
The Monthly Open marks the opening price of the current month.
🔹Previous Month High/Low
The Previous Month High (PMH) marks the highest price reached during the previous calendar month. It represents the point at which buyers achieved the strongest push before the monthly close.
The Previous Month Low (PML) marks the lowest price reached during the previous calendar month. It shows where selling pressure was strongest before buyers stepped back in.
When price pushes above the PMH or below the PML, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Midnight Open
The Midnight Open marks the first price of the trading day at 00:00 EST.
🔹08:30 Open
The 08:30 Open marks the opening price at 08:30 EST.
🔹Customization Options:
Users can fully customize the appearance of all key levels, including the following:
Labels
Label Size
Line Style
Line Colors
Labels:
Users can toggle on ‘Show Labels’ to display labels for each toggled-on level that price hasn’t pushed above/below. Users can also adjust the size of labels, choosing between auto, tiny, small, normal, large, or huge.
Line Style:
Users can select a line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted, which is applied to all toggled-on key levels.
Line Color:
Users can choose different colors for each of the following key levels:
Daily Open, Previous Day High, Previous Day Low
Weekly Open, Previous Week High, Previous Week Low,
Monthly Open, Previous Month High, Previous Month Low
Midnight Open
08:30 Open
🔹Extend Levels:
When enabled, each key level is extended forward by a set number of bars.
Please Note: Disabling a level in the “Key Levels” section only hides its visuals and does not affect the indicator’s signals.
🔹Swing Levels
The indicator automatically plots Swing Highs and Swing Lows which are used in the indicator’s signal generation logic.
A swing high forms when a candle’s high is greater than the highs of the bars immediately before and after it.
A swing low forms when a candle’s low is lower than the lows of the bars immediately before and after it.
🔹Swing Level Colors
Users can customize the color of Active Levels and Swept Levels.
Active Levels are levels that price has not pushed above or below
Swept Levels are levels that price pushed above or below.
🔹Swing Levels – Show Nearest
This setting determines how many swing highs/lows are displayed on the chart. The indicator will display the nearest X highs to price and the nearest X lows to price.
For example, if ‘Show Nearest’ is set to 2, the nearest 2 swing highs and nearest 2 swing lows to price will be plotted on the chart.
LIQUIDITY LEVELS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator automatically identifies and plots liquidity at key structural points in the market. These include swing highs and swing lows, session highs and lows, and major higher timeframe reference points as explained in the SESSIONS and KEY LEVELS sections above. All of these areas are treated as potential pools of resting orders and are used throughout the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹What is Buyside Liquidity?:
Buyside Liquidity (BSL) represents price levels where many buy stop orders are sitting, usually from traders holding short positions. When price moves into these areas, those stop-loss orders get triggered and short sellers are forced to buy back their positions. These zones often form above key highs such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding BSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the sudden wave of buy orders can create sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹What is Sellside Liquidity?:
Sellside Liquidity (SSL) represents price levels where many sell stop orders are waiting, usually from traders holding long positions. When price drops into these areas, those stop-loss orders are triggered and long traders are forced to sell their positions. These zones often form below key lows such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding SSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the surge of sell orders can cause sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹 Which Liquidity Levels Are Used
The indicator tracks liquidity at the following areas:
Asia Session High/Low
London High/Low
NY AM High/Low
NY Lunch High/Low
NY PM High/Low
Previous Day High and Low
Previous Week High and Low
Previous Month High and Low
Daily Open
Weekly Open
Monthly Open
Swing Highs/Lows
🔹 How Liquidity Levels Are Used
All tracked levels across sessions, swing points, and higher timeframes serve as potential liquidity targets. When price trades above one of these highs, the indicator looks for short setups if other confluences align. When price trades below lows, the indicator looks for long setups if other confluences align.
LIQUIDITY SWEEPS:
The indicator automatically detects Buyside Liquidity and Sellside Liquidity sweeps using the liquidity levels mentioned in the previous section.
🔹What is a Liquidity Sweep?
Liquidity sweeps occur when price trades beyond a key high or low and activates resting buy-stop or sell-stop orders in that area. It’s how the market gathers the liquidity needed for larger participants to enter positions.
Traders often place stop-loss orders around obvious highs and lows, such as the previous day’s, week’s, or month’s levels. When price pushes through one of these areas, it triggers the stops placed there and generates a burst of volume. This can lead to quick movements in price as those orders are executed.
🔹Sellside Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips below a Sellside Liquidity (SSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by long traders below that low. When this happens, the indicator records the sweep and begins monitoring for potential long setups as the next step in the IFVG trading strategy. Long trades are only eligible after a SSL sweep.
🔹Buyside Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips above a Buyside Liquidity (BSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by short seller traders above that high. When this happens, the indicator records the sweep and begins monitoring for potential short setups as the next step in the trading strategy. Short trades are only eligible after a BSL sweep.
🔹How to Use Liquidity Sweeps
Liquidity sweeps are not direct trade signals. They are best used as context when forming a directional bias. A sweep shows that the market has removed liquidity from one side, which can hint at where the next move may develop.
For example:
When BSL is swept, it often signals that buy stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move lower. Traders may then begin looking for short opportunities.
When SSL is swept, it often signals that sell stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move higher. Traders may then begin looking for long opportunities.
V SHAPE RECOVERIES:
🔹 What Is a V Shape Recovery?
A V shape recovery is a sharp, immediate reversal that happens right after price sweeps BSL or SSL. It indicates that price quickly moved back in the opposite direction after trading through the level. This behavior signals a shift in momentum and is a required confirmation in the indicator for signal generation. The indicator will not look for long trades after a SSL sweep unless a V shape recovery occurs. It will not look for short trades after a BSL sweep unless a V shape recovery occurs. Without this behavior, the indicator assumes that price may still be delivering in the direction of the sweep, so no valid setups can form.
🔹 Why V Shape Recoveries Matter
V shape recoveries help confirm that the liquidity the sweep did not immediately continue in the same direction. They separate false breaks from true continuation. A sweep without recovery often means price may keep trending, so the indicator does not generate signals in those cases. A sweep with a V shape recovery confirms rejection and sets the foundation for valid Inversion Fair Value Gap formation. This makes the V shape recovery one of the most important sequence steps in the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model.
🔹 How the Indicator Detects V Shape Recoveries
V shape recoveries can be visually intuitive when looking at a chart, but they are difficult to define consistently programmatically. To ensure reliable and repeatable detection, the indicator uses a rules-based method that evaluates candle size, candle direction, and the strength of the move immediately following the liquidity sweep. This approach removes subjectivity and allows the indicator to confirm V shape behavior the same way every time.
The indicator does not plot any visual elements specifically for V shape recoveries. Instead, the presence of a V shape recovery is implied through the signals themselves. Every valid long or short signal that appears after a liquidity sweep requires a confirmed V shape recovery. This means that if a signal is generated following a sweep, a V shape recovery has occurred.
🔹 V Shape Recovery After a Sellside Sweep (SSL Sweep)
After price trades below a sellside liquidity level, long positions are liquidated. If buyers quickly step in and force price upward with strong momentum, this forms a V shape recovery. This signals that the sweep below the low was rejected and that buyers have reclaimed control. When this occurs, the indicator begins monitoring for long setups.
🔹 V Shape Recovery After a Buyside Sweep (BSL Sweep)
After price pushes above a buyside liquidity level, many short positions are stopped out. If sellers immediately step in and drive price back down with strong movement, this forms a V shape recovery. This behavior reflects a quick change in candle direction immediately following the sweep. When this occurs, the indicator begins monitoring for short setups.
🔹Failed V Shape Recoveries
These examples show failed V shape recoveries, where price did not reverse decisively after the BSL or SSL sweep. The lack of strong response from buyers or sellers indicates that momentum did not shift. Thus, the indicator will not detect valid long/short setups using these liquidity sweeps.
HIGHER-TIMEFRAME FAIR VALUE GAPS:
Higher-timeframe Fair Value Gaps (HTF FVGs) provide important context in the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model because they show where significant imbalance occurred on larger market structures. The indicator automatically detects HTF FVGs and uses them as part of the signal rating system.
🔹 What Is a Fair Value Gap?
A Fair Value Gap (FVG) is an area where the market’s perception of fair value suddenly changes. On your chart, it appears as a three-candle pattern: a large candle in the middle, with smaller candles on each side that don’t fully overlap it.
A bullish FVG forms when a bullish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
A bearish FVG forms when a bearish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
This creates an imbalance because price moved so quickly that one side of the auction did not trade.
Examples:
🔹 What Makes an FVG “Higher-Timeframe”?
In this indicator, HTF FVGs are Fair Value Gaps detected on timeframes higher than the chart’s current timeframe. For example, on a 5-minute chart, a 1-hour FVG would be considered a HTF FVG. The indicator automatically plots and checks whether price interacts with these HTF FVGs during a liquidity sweep and incorporates this into the signal rating (A, A+, A++).
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Higher-Timeframe FVGs
The indicator automatically scans up to three user-selected higher timeframes for valid bullish and bearish FVGs and tracks price’s behavior around them in the background. When any of these higher timeframes are enabled, their FVGs are used directly within the signal logic.
During a liquidity sweep, the indicator checks whether price taps into any enabled HTF FVG. A tap occurs when price trades inside the boundaries of a higher-timeframe FVG during or immediately after the sweep.
A bullish HTF FVG tap during a sellside sweep supports a long setup.
A bearish HTF FVG tap during a buyside sweep supports a short setup.
When an HTF FVG tap aligns with the direction of the setup, the signal’s rating is increased. This can increase a setup’s rating from A to A+ or from A+ to A++.
🔹 Higher-Timeframe FVG Customization
Users can select up to three higher timeframes for HTF FVG detection. When a higher timeframe is enabled, its FVGs are used in the model’s signal logic. Users can also choose whether to display these HTF FVGs visually on the chart, by enabling the ‘Plot HTF FVGs’ setting.
Each enabled HTF FVG can be customized with the following options:
Bullish and Bearish Colors: Users can set different fill colors for bullish and bearish HTF FVGs for each selected timeframe.
Midline: When enabled, a midline is drawn through the center of each HTF FVG. Users can customize the midline’s line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted and also customize the midline’s color.
Labels: When enabled, each plotted HTF FVG displays a label that shows its originating timeframe (for example, 1H, 4H).
Plot HTF FVGs: When disabled, the HTF FVG zones are hidden from the chart while the logic remains active in the background for signals.
Show Nearest:
This setting controls how many HTF FVGs are displayed based on proximity to current price. Users can choose to show the nearest X bullish HTF FVGs and the nearest X bearish HTF FVGs. This filter is applied across all enabled higher timeframes and does not limit by timeframe individually.
🔹When are Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gaps mitigated?
A Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gap is considered mitigated when a candle from the chart’s timeframe closes above the gap for a bearish FVG or below the gap for a bullish FVG.
INVERSION FAIR VALUE GAPS:
Inversion Fair Value Gaps (IFVGs) are a core requirement of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model. Every long and short signal generated by the indicator requires a valid IFVG, just like liquidity sweeps and V shape recoveries. Without a confirmed IFVG, the model will not produce a setup.
🔹 What Is an Inversion Fair Value Gap?
An Inversion Fair Value Gap is a Fair Value Gap that becomes invalidated by a candle close in the opposite direction. This “flip” confirms that the original imbalance failed and that the market has shifted.
A bullish IFVG forms when a bearish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing above it.
A bearish IFVG forms when a bullish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing below it.
In the indicator, IFVGs are not used as retracement areas. Signals are generated immediately when a valid IFVG forms, not after price returns to the gap. The IFVG itself is the confirmation event that finalizes a setup sequence after a liquidity sweep and V shape recovery.
🔹 How the Indicator Plots IFVGs
The indicator only plots IFVGs that are used in long or short setups. Not every possible IFVG is shown on the chart. Only the IFVG involved in a confirmed signal is displayed. Users can disable IFVG plots entirely if they prefer a minimal view. This hides the visual gaps but does not affect the signal logic.
🔹 Customization Options
Users can customize how IFVGs appear on the chart:
Color Settings: Choose separate fill colors for bullish IFVGs and bearish IFVGs.
Midline: Toggle an optional midline inside the IFVG and choose between a solid, dashed, or dotted line.
Midline Color: Adjust the color of the IFVG Midline.
MACROS:
Macros are short, predefined time windows, where price is more likely to seek liquidity or rebalance imbalances. These periods often create sharp movements or shifts in delivery, giving additional context to setups. In the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model, macros are used as a confluence factor. When a long or short signal forms during a macro time window, the setup’s rating can increase from A to A+ or from A+ to A++.
Macros are not required for a signal to form, but they increase the signal’s rating when the setup aligns with macro timing.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Macros
The indicator allows users to enable up to five macros. Each macro has its own start and end time, which the user can customize. These time windows are used directly in the signal logic. If a valid IFVG setup forms while price is inside any of the enabled macro windows, the indicator increases the signal’s rating.
Users may visually disable macros on the chart without affecting signal logic. Disabling visuals hides the macro zones, labels, and lines, but the underlying macro logic continues to function in the background for signals.
The indicator’s default macros use the following time periods (in EST):
09:50 - 10:10
10:50 - 11:10
11:50 - 12:10
12:50 - 13:10
13:50 - 14:10
🔹 Macro Settings
Each macro displays a shaded zone representing the active time window. This zone can be toggled on or off. Users can customize:
The color of each macro zone
The opacity of each zone
Whether the zones display at all (‘Show Zones’)
These visuals help identify whether price is currently inside a macro window.
🔹 Macro Labels:
Users can enable macro labels, which place a text label showing the macro’s title and its time window. The label color is global (applies to all macros), and the label size can be adjusted. Individual macros cannot have unique label colors.
🔹 Macro Start/End Lines
For additional clarity, the indicator draws two vertical markers for each macro:
One at the start of the macro
One at the end of the macro
A horizontal macro line is then drawn between the highs of these two candles to highlight the full duration of the macro window. Users can customize:
The line styles (solid, dashed, dotted) of the Macro Line and Start/End Lines
BIAS:
Bias determines which direction the indicator is allowed to generate signals. A bullish bias means only long setups can be confirmed. A bearish bias means only short setups can be confirmed. The bias acts as the final directional filter after a liquidity sweep, V shape recovery, and IFVG have all been validated. Even if all model conditions are met, the indicator will only confirm the setup if the direction aligns with the active bias.
Users are able to manually set a bias or use an automatic bias filter, which is explained below.
🔹 Manual Bias
Users can manually choose the directional bias at any time and choose between Bullish, Bearish, or Both.
When set to Bullish, the indicator will only confirm long setups, regardless of market structure.
When set to Bearish, only short setups are allowed.
When set to Both, the indicator can confirm both long and short setups if all requirements are met.
🔹 Automatic Bias
Automatic bias is fully rules-based and determined by how the previous session interacted with major draw-on-liquidity (DOL) levels. These levels include 1-hour highs and lows, 4-hour highs and lows, previous session highs and lows (such as Asia or London), and the previous day’s high and low. The indicator evaluates whether the previous session consolidated, manipulated liquidity, or manipulated and reversed before closing. Based on this behavior, the indicator establishes a directional bias for the current session.
◇ Previous Session Consolidation:
If the previous session did not sweep any major liquidity levels and price remained inside its range, the session is classified as consolidation.
After the current session sweeps a key low, the bias becomes bullish.
After the current session sweeps a key high, the bias becomes bearish.
The bias is determined live based on which side the current session manipulates first.
◇ Previous Session Manipulation (No Reversal):
If the previous session swept a major high-timeframe level but did not reverse before the session closed, the model assigns a reversal-based bias at the start of the current session.
If the previous session swept a low, the current session bias is bullish.
If the previous session swept a high, the current session bias is bearish.
Here, bias is determined immediately because the previous session’s manipulation defines the directional framework for the current session.
◇ Previous Session Manipulation + Reversal:
If the previous session swept a DOL level and also reversed away from it within the same session, the model assigns a continuation-based bias at the start of the current session.
If the previous session swept a low and reversed upward, the bias for the current session is bullish.
If the previous session swept a high and reversed downward, the bias is bearish.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Bias in Practice
After the indicator validates the liquidity sweep, V shape recovery, and IFVG, it checks the active bias before confirming a signal.
If bias is bullish, only long setups are allowed.
If bias is bearish, only short setups are allowed.
If bias is Both, setups of either direction may form.
The bias does not influence the detection of liquidity sweeps, V shape recoveries, or IFVGs. It only determines whether those validated components are allowed to produce a final signal. Automatic bias updates based on session behavior, while manual bias remains fixed until the user changes it.
SIGNALS:
Signals are the final output of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator. A signal is only generated when all model conditions are satisfied in a clear, rules-based sequence.
A signal consists of:
An Entry
A Stop-Loss (SL)
A Breakeven (BE) level
Two Take-Profit levels (TP1 and TP2)
These components are plotted immediately once the final requirement (the IFVG confirmation) is met and the directional filter (bias) allows the setup.
Signals can be rated A, A+, or A++, based on whether certain confluences were present during the setup’s formation.
🔹 What All Signals Have in Common
Each signal type (A, A+, A++) requires the same four mandatory conditions. If any of these four are missing, the indicator will not print a signal.
◇ Required Component #1 – Valid Directional Bias
The bias determines whether the indicator can confirm a long or short setup.
Bullish bias → only long setups allowed
Bearish bias → only short setups allowed
Both → long or short setups allowed
Automatic bias → bias determined by session-based liquidity logic explained above
◇ Required Component #2 – Liquidity Sweep
The indicator must detect one of the following:
Sellside Liquidity Sweep (SSL Sweep) for potential long setups
Buyside Liquidity Sweep (BSL Sweep) for potential short setups
◇ Required Component #3 – V Shape Recovery
After a liquidity sweep, the indicator evaluates whether price produced a valid V shape recovery.
◇ Required Component #4 – Inversion Fair Value Gap (IFVG)
An IFVG must form in the direction of the potential setup.
A bullish IFVG forms when a bearish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing above that gap
A bearish IFVG forms when a bullish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing below that gap
The IFVG must occur after the V Shape Recovery and Liquidity Sweep. The IFVG confirmation is the final structural requirement. Once it forms, the setup is considered structurally complete.
🔹 A Signals
An A-rated signal contains exactly the four required components:
Valid Bias
Liquidity Sweep
V Shape Recovery
IFVG
An A signals represent the foundational implementation of the IFVG Model.
🔹 A+ Signals
An A+ signal includes the full A-signal structure plus ONE of the following:
Higher-Timeframe FVG Tap
Multi-Liquidity Sweep
Inside a Macro Window
◇ Higher-Timeframe FVG Tap
During a liquidity sweep, the indicator checks whether price taps into any enabled HTF FVG. A tap occurs when price trades inside the boundaries of a higher-timeframe FVG during or immediately after the sweep.
A bullish HTF FVG tap during a sellside sweep supports a long setup.
A bearish HTF FVG tap during a buyside sweep supports a short setup.
◇ Multi-Liquidity Sweep
A Multi-Liquidity Sweep occurs when price sweeps two liquidity levels of the same type in the same directional push.
Sweeping two lows in one move: Multi-Sellside Liquidity Sweep (long setups).
Sweeping two highs in one move → Multi-Buyside Liquidity Sweep (short setups).
◇ Inside a Macro Window
The final IFVG confirmation must occur inside a macro time window defined by the user.
If exactly one of these additional confluences is present, the signal rating is A+.
🔹 A++ Signals (Two Additional Confluences)
An A++ signal contains the full A signal structure plus TWO of the three confluences listed above.
HTF FVG tap + Multi-Liquidity Sweep
HTF FVG tap + Inside a Macro Window
Multi-Liquidity Sweep + Inside a Macro Window
If two confluences are present, the rating becomes A++. If all three are present, the setup is still rated a A++ (there is no A+++).
🔹 Signal Plots
When a valid long/short setup is detected, a signal with its rating appears with the following:
Entry: At the close of the candle that inverted a FVG
Stop-Loss: At the nearest swing high for short setups or nearest swing low for long setups
Breakeven Level: At the nearest swing high for long setups or the nearest swing low for short setups
Take-Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high for long setups or the second nearest swing low for short setups.
Take-Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high for long setups or the third nearest swing low for short setups.
After a signal reaches either TP2 or SL, the levels for Entry, SL, BE, TP1, and TP2 are removed from the chart. If another signal appears before the prior signal reaches either TP2 or SL, the levels are also removed.
Users can hover over any signal label to view a short summary of the exact criteria that were met for that setup. This includes whether a HTF FVG tap occurred, whether a multi-liquidity sweep was detected, whether the setup formed inside a macro window, and which liquidity level was swept prior to the V shape recovery.
🔹 Long Setup – A Rating
A long A-rated setup forms when all four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur without any additional confluences. First, price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level. Immediately after the sweep, price must form a valid V shape recovery. Once the recovery completes, a bullish IFVG must form by invalidating a bearish Fair Value Gap with a candle close above it.
For a confirmed long signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that invalidates the bearish FVG and creates the IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps a swing low, has a V Shape recovery, and forms a bullish IFVG:
🔹 Short Setup – A Rating
A short A-rated setup forms when all four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur without any additional confluences. Price must first sweep a Buyside Liquidity level. Immediately after the sweep, price must form a valid V shape recovery. Once the recovery completes, a bearish IFVG must form by invalidating a bullish Fair Value Gap with a candle close below it.
For a confirmed short signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that invalidates the bullish FVG and creates the IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bearish IFVG:
🔹 Long Setup – A+ Rating
A long A+ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and exactly one additional confluence is present. Price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bullish IFVG by invalidating a bearish FVG. One of the following must also occur: a bullish HTF FVG tap during the liquidity sweep, a multi-sellside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forms inside a macro window.
For a confirmed long A+ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bullish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps the NY AM Session Low, taps a 30-minute HTF FVG during the sweep, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bullish IFVG:
🔹 Short Setup – A+ Rating
A short A+ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and exactly one additional confluence is present. Price must sweep a Buyside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bearish IFVG by invalidating a bullish FVG. One of the following must also occur: a bearish HTF FVG tap, a multi-buyside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forms inside a macro window.
For a confirmed short A+ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bearish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bearish IFVG inside of the 13:50-14:10 macro:
🔹 Long Setup – A++ Rating
A long A++ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and at least two additional confluences are present. Price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bullish IFVG. The setup must also include any two or three of the following: a bullish HTF FVG tap, a multi-sellside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forming inside a macro window.
For a confirmed long A++ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bullish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps two swing lows, has a V shape recovery, taps a bullish 30-minute HTF FVG during the liquidity sweep, and forms a bullish IFVG inside of the 10:50-11:10 macro:
🔹 Short Setup – A++ Rating
A short A++ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and at least two additional confluences are present. Price must sweep a Buyside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bearish IFVG. The setup must also include any two or three of the following: a bearish HTF FVG tap, a multi-buyside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forming inside a macro window.
For a confirmed short A++ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bearish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, taps a bearish 30-minute HTF FVG during the liquidity sweep, and forms a bearish IFVG inside of the 09:50-10:10 macro:
🔹Signal Settings
◇ Liquidity Levels Used:
Users can select which type of liquidity levels the indicator uses for identifying liquidity sweeps:
Swing Points: Only uses Swing Highs/Lows
Session Highs/Lows: Only uses Session Highs/Lows
Both: Uses both Swing Highs/Lows and Session Highs/Lows
◇ Bias:
This setting determines which signal directions are allowed.
Manual Bias: Users can manually choose the directional bias, picking between Bullish, Bearish, or Both.
Automatic Bias: The indicator automatically determines a directional bias based on the criteria mentioned in the previous Bias section.
◇ IFVG Sensitivity:
This setting determines the minimum gap size required for an FVG to qualify as an Inversion FVG.
Higher values: only larger FVGs become IFVGs
Lower values: smaller gaps are allowed
◇ Use First Presented IFVG:
This setting determines whether the indicator limits signals to only the first IFVG created within the manipulation leg.
What Is the First Presented IFVG?
It is the earliest FVG formed inside the displacement that causes the liquidity sweep.
For a bearish manipulation leg (price moving downward into the sweep), the first presented IFVG is the first FVG created at the start of that downward move:
For a bullish manipulation leg (price moving upward into the sweep), the first presented IFVG is the first FVG created at the start of that upward move:
When this setting is enabled, the indicator will only confirm signals when the IFVG used is derived from this first presented FVG. IFVGs that form later in the manipulation leg are not used for signal generation.
◇ Only Take Trades:
This setting allows users to restrict signals to a defined time window.
If a complete setup occurs inside the time window, it is allowed and plotted
If it occurs outside the window, the signal will not appear
For example, if you only wanted to see long/short signals between 9:30 AM and 12:00 PM, you would enable this setting and set the time window from 09:30 - 12:00.
◇ Minimum R:R
This setting allows users to require a minimum risk-to-reward ratio before a signal is confirmed and plotted on the chart. The risk-to-reward ratio is calculated using the distance from the Entry to the Stop-Loss (risk) and the distance from the Entry to TP2 (reward). The indicator compares these distances and determines whether the setup meets or exceeds the minimum R:R value selected by the user.
If the calculated R:R is equal to or greater than the chosen threshold, the signal will be displayed.
If the calculated R:R is lower than the threshold, the signal will not appear on the chart.
🔹 Signal Rating Minimum
Users can restrict which signal ratings appear:
A: shows all signals
A+: shows only A+ and A++
A++: shows only A++ setups
🔹 Signal Styling and Customization
The indicator provides full control over how signal labels and levels appear on your chart. Users can customize long signals, short signals, all plotted lines, and the visibility of every individual element.
◇ Long Signal Styling
Users can customize:
Long Signal Label Color
Long Signal Text Color
Long Signal Label Size
◇ Short Signal Styling
Users can customize:
Short Signal Label Color
Short Signal Text Color
Short Signal Label Size
◇ Entry, Stop Loss, Breakeven, and Take Profit Lines
Each line type can be enabled or disabled individually:
Entry Line
Stop Loss Line
Breakeven Line
Take Profit 1 & 2 Lines
Users can also set custom colors for each line so every level is easy to track during live price movement.
◇ Show Price Labels
Price labels can be toggled on or off individually for each level. Users can choose whether to show or hide the price for:
Entry
Stop loss
Breakeven
Take Profit 1 & 2
NEW DAY OPENING GAP:
The New Day Opening Gap (NDOG) highlights the price difference between the previous day’s closing candle and the first candle of the new trading day. The indicator tracks this gap automatically each day and makes it available as optional context for users.
🔹 What Is the New Day Opening Gap?
A New Day Opening Gap forms when the trading day opens at a price different from the previous day’s final closing price.
If the new day opens above the prior day’s close → Bullish NDOG
If the new day opens below the prior day’s close → Bearish NDOG
This gap acts as a short-term draw on liquidity because the market may revisit the gap to rebalance price delivery. While the NDOG is not a required component for IFVG signals.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses the New Day Opening Gap
When enabled, the indicator plots the gap as a rectangular zone spanning from the previous day’s close to the new day’s open. The zone remains active until it is fully filled by price or until the next day’s opening gap forms. Once price trades through the entire gap, or once a new NDOG replaces it the following day, the zone becomes inactive and is removed from the chart. The indicator does not use the NDOG for signal generation. It is strictly a visual tool that helps traders identify areas where price may retrace or seek liquidity during the session.
🔹 Customization Options
Users have full control over how the New Day Opening Gap displays on the chart:
Show New Day Opening Gap: Toggle the NDOG zone on or off
Bullish NDOG Color: Customize the fill color for gaps formed above the prior close
Bearish NDOG Color: Customize the fill color for gaps formed below the prior close
NEW WEEK OPENING GAP:
The New Week Opening Gap (NWOG) highlights the price difference between the previous week’s final closing candle and the first candle of the new trading week. The indicator tracks this gap automatically each week and provides it as optional context for users.
🔹 What Is the New Week Opening Gap?
A New Week Opening Gap forms when the new trading week opens at a price different from the previous week’s closing price.
If the new week opens above the prior week’s close → Bullish NWOG
If the new week opens below the prior week’s close → Bearish NWOG
This gap often serves as a medium-term draw on liquidity because price may return to rebalance the weekly displacement. The NWOG is not a required component for IFVG signals.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses the New Week Opening Gap
When enabled, the indicator plots the gap as a rectangular zone spanning from the previous week’s close to the new week’s open. The zone remains active until it is fully filled by price or until the next week’s opening gap forms. Once price trades through the entire gap, or once a new NWOG replaces it the following week, the zone becomes inactive and is removed from the chart. The indicator does not use the NWOG for signal generation. It is purely a visual reference to help traders identify areas where price may rebalance or seek liquidity during the week.
🔹 Customization Options
Users have full control over how the New Week Opening Gap displays on the chart:
Show New Week Opening Gap: Toggle the NWOG zone on or off
Bullish NWOG Color: Set the fill color for gaps formed above the prior weekly close
Bearish NWOG Color: Set the fill color for gaps formed below the prior weekly close
SMT DIVERGENCES:
The indicator automatically marks SMT Divergences that occur between the current selected chart ticker and a second user-selected ticker.
A SMT Divergence forms when the prices of the currently selected chart ticker and the user-selected ticker don’t follow each other. For example, if the current chart’s ticker symbol is SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ and the user-selected ticker is $ES. If SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ does not sweep the low of the NY AM Session, but NYSE:ES sweeps that same exact session’s low during the same candle, then a SMT Divergence is detected.
In the images below, SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ and NYSE:ES form a low at 12:20 AM on November 12th. At 12:35 AM, the 12:20 AM low is taken out on $NQ. However, on NYSE:ES , price failed to take out this exact low at 12:35 AM. Thus, an SMT Divergence is detected, and a line is drawn between the two lows on $NQ.
NYSE:ES Chart:
SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ Chart:
🔹 SMT Divergence Settings
The indicator includes settings that allow users to control how SMT Divergences are detected and displayed.
◇ Length
Length controls how sensitive the pivot detection is when finding highs and lows for SMT.
Lower Length: confirms swings with fewer bars, so more swings qualify.
Higher Length: requires more bars to confirm a swing, so fewer swings qualify.
◇ Divergence Length
The Divergence Length setting defines how many bars apart the two swing points may be for them to count as part of the same SMT Divergence.
Higher Values: The two instruments can form their swing highs or lows farther apart in time. As long as both swings occur within this wider bar window, the indicator compares them for divergence.
Lower Values: The two swing points must occur very close to each other.
◇ Show Last
This setting limits how many recent SMT Divergences are displayed on the chart. For example, setting Show Last to 1 will only show the most recent SMT Divergence, while higher values allow more historical SMT Divergences to remain visible on the chart.
◇ Divergence Ticker
Users can change the ticker used for detections. Since SMT Divergences occur by comparing two tickers, the inputted ticker within the settings will always be compared to the current selected ticker on your chart.
DASHBOARD:
The dashboard provides a live summary of all major components of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model. It updates every candle and displays the current state of each requirement used in the setup logic.
🔹 Real-Time Model Components
The state of each component is displayed with the following:
✔️ = condition is satisfied
❌ = condition is not satisfied
🐂 / 🐻 = current directional bias (bullish or bearish)
The dashboard actively tracks the following:
◇ Bias (🐂 Bullish, 🐻 Bearish, or Both)
Shows the current bias with a bull or bear emoji. If using automatic bias, the dashboard updates as soon as the session logic determines a direction.
◇ Liquidity Sweep
Displays ✔️ once a valid BSL Sweep (for shorts) or SSL Sweep (for longs) is detected.
Shows ❌ when no sweep is present.
◇ V Shape Recovery
Displays ✔️ when a confirmed V shape recovery forms after the sweep.
Shows ❌ until a valid V shape appears.
◇ Inversion Fair Value Gap (IFVG)
Shows ✔️ once a bullish or bearish IFVG forms in the correct direction.
Shows ❌ when no IFVG has yet confirmed.
◇ Higher-Timeframe FVG Interaction
Displays ✔️ when price is currently inside any enabled HTF FVG or taps a HTF FVG during a liquidity sweep.
Displays ❌ when price is not inside a HTF imbalance.
◇ Clear Opposite Draw on Liquidity (DOL)
Shows ✔️ when a clear opposite-side draw is present in the model logic.
Shows ❌ if no clear opposite draw is detected.
◇ SMT Divergence
Shows ✔️ for 20 candles immediately after an SMT Divergence forms.
After 20 candles, it returns to ❌ unless a new SMT Divergence is detected.
🔹 Signal Information Display
When a valid long or short signal appears, the dashboard expands to show the full details of the setup, including:
Signal Rating
Entry Price
Stop-Loss Price
Breakeven Price
Take Profit 1 Price
Take Profit 2 Price
🔹 Trade Statistics Module
Users can enable a built-in statistics panel to view historical performance of signals across all ratings. The trade stats include:
A Signal Win Rate
A+ Signal Win Rate
A++ Signal Win Rate
Long Signal Win Rate
Short Signal Win Rate
Total Number of Trades Used in the Calculations
A trade is counted as a win if price reaches breakeven before stop-loss. A trade is counted as a loss if price hits stop-loss before breakeven.
🔹 Dashboard Customization
The dashboard includes several options to control its appearance and position:
Show Dashboard: Toggle the entire dashboard on or off
Dashboard Size: Choose the size of the dashboard
Dashboard Position: Choose the location of the dashboard on the chart
Trade Stats Text Color: Customize the color of the 2nd column outputs under the Trade Stats section in the dashboard
◇ Component Toggles
Users can enable or disable the display of any model component based on preference. Each of these items can be shown or hidden independently:
Setup Rating
Entry
Stop-Loss
Breakeven
Take Profit 1
Take Profit 2
Bias
Liquidity Sweep
Higher-Timeframe FVG Interaction
V Shape Recovery
Inversion FVG
Clear Opposite Draw on Liquidity
Trade Stats
These toggles only affect visual display. Disabling any of them does not affect the underlying indicator’s logic.
ALERTS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model includes full alert functionality using AnyAlert(), allowing users to receive notifications in real time for all major model components and signal events.
Users can enable or disable each alert type in the “Alerts” section of the settings. After selecting which alerts they want active, they can create a single TradingView alert using the AnyAlert() condition. This will automatically trigger alerts for all enabled events as soon as they occur on the chart.
Available Alerts:
Long Signal
Short Signal
Breakeven Hit (BE)
Take Profit 1 Hit (TP1)
Take Profit 2 Hit (TP2)
Stop-Loss Hit (SL)
Liquidity Sweep Detected
SMT Divergence Detected
How to Receive Alerts:
Open the TradingView alert creation window.
Select the IFVG Model indicator as the alert condition.
Choose AnyAlert() from the condition dropdown.
Create the alert.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
TradingView has limitations when running features on multiple timeframes such as the HTF FVGs, which can result in the following restriction:
Computation Error:
The computation of using MTF features is very intensive on TradingView. This can sometimes cause calculation timeouts. When this occurs, simply force the recalculation by modifying one indicator’s settings or by removing the indicator and adding it to your chart again.
UNIQUENESS:
This indicator is unique because it organizes every part of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model into one structured, rules based system. It detects liquidity sweeps, confirms V shape recoveries, identifies valid IFVGs, checks higher timeframe FVG taps, reads macro timing, and applies a session based directional bias. All of these components are evaluated in a fixed sequence so users always know exactly why a signal appears. Every part of the logic is customizable, including which liquidity types are used, which IFVGs qualify for signals, which time windows allow trades, the minimum risk to reward for a setup, and all visual elements on the chart. The tool also includes optional SMT Divergence detection, daily and weekly opening gaps, a live dashboard that shows the state of each model requirement, and optional signal performance statistics.
[GetSparx] Nova Pro⚡ Nova Pro – Position Calculator
This indicator is a user-friendly TradingView indicator designed to help traders plan and visualize their entry and exit points, calculate position sizing, and instantly display key risk metrics. By simply entering three price levels (Entry, Take Profit and Stop Loss) along with a risk amount in USD, the indicator draws color-coded lines and labels on the chart, and generates a concise table with all computed values. This allows you to assess the risk-reward profile of any trade at a glance, without performing manual calculations.
⚙️ How It Works
When the indicator is added to the chart it will ask to specify the price inputs and the risk amount in USD.
Price Inputs (Entry, TP, SL)
• You specify three price levels: the entry price, the profit target (Take Profit) and the loss threshold (Stop Loss).
• Inputs use TradingView’s native price-picker fields. Any change is immediately reflected on the chart.
Visual Display
• Each level is plotted as a line stretching into the future for enough room.
• Labels on the right show the exact price, color-coded: orange for Entry, green for TP and red for SL.
• Previous lines and labels are automatically removed when parameters change, ensuring the chart remains clean.
Risk Calculations
• The entered risk amount (in USD) is combined with the distance between Entry and SL to compute the optimal number of units (Qty) to trade.
• The script automatically detects whether it’s a long or short trade based on the relative positions of Entry and TP.
• Note that the risk and reward calculations do not factor in exchange fees, slippage, funding rates or any other trading costs. Actual profit and loss may differ once transaction fees and market execution variances are applied, so be sure to adjust your position sizing and expectations accordingly.
🎯 What You Can Do With It
• Consistent Position Sizing
Automate your position size so you consistently risk the same dollar amount, regardless of price volatility or stop distance.
• Clear Risk Management
Instantly view your Reward-to-Risk ratio, potential profit in USD and exact risk amount, so you make well-informed decisions.
• Rapid Scenario Analysis
Adjust TP, SL or Entry on the fly to see how each change affects your potential profit, loss and RR ratio.
• Publication-Ready Charts
The visual elements and integrated table are optimized for TradingView publications, giving your analysis a professional, polished look.
📊 Explanation of Table Values
• Entry
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered entry price.
Marks the exact level at which you initiate the trade and serves as the reference point for all further risk and reward calculations.
• Quantity (Qty)
Calculation: Risk USD ÷ (Entry − Stop Loss).
Determines how many units, contracts or shares to trade so that a stop-out at your SL equals exactly your predefined dollar risk, resulting in consistent per-trade exposure.
• Risk to Reward (RR)
Calculation: (Take Profit − Entry) ÷ (Entry − Stop Loss).
Expresses how many dollars of potential profit you target for each dollar you risk. Values above 1 mean the reward exceeds the risk, guiding you to favorable setups.
• Take Profit (TP)
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered take-profit price.
Your target exit level for booking gains, highlighted in green on the chart. Shows where you plan to capture profits if the market moves in your favor.
• Profit
Calculation: Qty × (Take Profit − Entry).
Gives the absolute potential gain in USD if price reaches your TP. Useful for comparing total return across different instruments or setups.
• Stop Loss (SL)
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered stop-loss price.
The level at which your trade is automatically closed to cap losses, highlighted in red on the chart. Ensures you never lose more than your defined risk amount.
• Risk
Calculation: equals the entered Risk USD.
The maximum dollar amount you’re willing to lose on this trade. Acts as the upper boundary for your exposure, keeping your position sizing disciplined.
📝 Examples
• Long Example 1: Bitcoin/USD
Entry: $11851.1
Take Profit: $123853.9
Stop Loss: $115467.7
Risk USD: $500
The Risk to Reward ratio results in 2.25, which means the reward exceeds the risk.
For each dollar you risk, this setup has potential gains of 2.25 dollars.
• Long Example 2: Algorand/USD
Entry: $0.2919
Take Profit: $0.3491
Stop Loss: $0.2655
Risk USD: $1000
The Risk to Reward ratio on this trade results in 2.17 and has a potential profit target of $2166.67. With a risk of $1000 USD the table conveniently shows a quantity of 37878 ALGO is needed for the trade.
• Short Example 1: Forex EUR/USD
Entry: $1.16666
Take Profit: $1.15459
Stop Loss: $1.17374
Risk USD: $200
With a risk of $200 USD and a RR of 2.17, this example shows how a short trade can be accomplished on EUR/USD.
• Short Example 2: Gold
Entry: $3366.29
Take Profit: $3272.01
Stop Loss: $3386.87
Risk USD: $1500
Within this short setup a risk of $1500 USD is used, which results in a RR of 4.58. The potential profit for this trade is $6871.72.
⚠ Disclaimer
This tool is for educational and analytical use only. It does not provide financial advice or trading signals. Always use proper risk management and do your own due diligence.
